JP2019005602A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having improved taste.SOLUTION: In a case where it is scheduled to change in future, if a current display mode is same and if the current stock number is large, it is easily determined to execute a false operation performance A at a higher probability than that of a case where the current stock number is small. If the stock number of an operation performance B is large, a player expects that the operation performance is further executed and the expectation degree is improved, excluding a case where the expectation degree is changed to the highest "rainbow" due to the stock number. Accordingly, as the stock number (the number of notification performances) of the current operation performance B increases more, a game machine improves execution frequency of the false operation performance A (suggestion performance) so as to increase the player's sense of expectation, thereby improving the taste of the game. Further, the game machine includes output means that outputs a specific signal for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means so as to improve noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction, while suppressing radio emission from a substrate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In a gaming machine capable of executing a pre-reading effect to be notified in advance by changing the hold display corresponding to the variable display to a display form other than the normal form, the display form of the hold display of the hold display to be notified is changed to a special form. There has been proposed a gaming machine that changes to a display mode with a high one-stage expectation for each shift timing (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-61580

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when the display mode of the hold display is changed to the special mode, the stage that finally changes from the remaining number of shifts is known.
The subsequent production became monotonous, and the improvement of interest was insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means (for example, steps S604, S606, S) for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level.
An effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of 702;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, movable members 9051 to 905
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating the motor 4, and
Specific signals for driving electrical components in response to control signals from the control means in the serial communication system (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11)
Output means (for example, light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 9041)
2, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals are the same. Transmitted sequentially between the light emitter drivers on the light emitter control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H (high).
Set to a low slew rate output state),
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, step S6).
(In the process of 05, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect A gaze is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 24)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the expectation can be suitably improved by the suggestion effect, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means (for example, steps S604, S606, S) for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level.
An effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of 702;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, movable members 9051 to 905
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating the motor 4, and
Specific signals for driving electrical components in response to control signals from the control means in the serial communication system (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11)
Output means (for example, light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 9041)
2, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided and a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, in FIG. 46 (2)). As shown, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 9041 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals.
3c sequentially transmitted)
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F.
13c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state)
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, step S6).
(In the process of 05, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect A gaze is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 24)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the expectation can be suitably improved by the suggestion effect, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
A plurality of notification effects can be executed in correspondence with one correspondence display (for example, FIG. 27F).
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
Corresponding display may be changed in a plurality of stages in correspondence with one notification effect.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
After the notification effect for notifying that the corresponding display changes to the highest display mode is executed, the execution of the suggestion effect is limited (as shown in FIG. 24, the current display mode is “rainbow”).
In this case, the action effect A gaze may not be executed).
According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
Predetermined effect determining means for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, steps S801 and S802)
A CPU 120 for effect control that executes the process of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect control C for executing a hold notice effect)
PU120)
With
The predetermined effect determining means includes
It is possible to determine to change the production mode at a plurality of change timings including at least the first timing and the second timing,
After determining the production mode and the final production mode when starting the predetermined production, the change mode of the production mode is determined based on the determined production mode and the final production mode at the start (step S801). After determining the display mode at the time of winning the corresponding display and the final display mode in step S,
In step 802, the number of change steps in each hold display number may be determined based on the level difference from the final display mode).
According to such a configuration, compression of data capacity can be reduced.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
First effect device (for example, sub display device 5S) and second effect device (for example, image display device 5)
When,
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, a hold notice effect),
The change effect execution means includes a first change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display using the first effect device (for example, the effect effect A of the modified example, see FIG. 29), the first effect device, and the The second change effect (for example, the effect effect B of the modified example, see FIG. 30) that can change the display mode of the corresponding display by the mode linked to the second effect device can be executed.
The degree of expectation may be different depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of changing effects by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following means 8 to 15. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is awarded to the player. There is something configured to give to. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine). In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine). The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds).
An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as “round”.

Some such gaming machines are configured such that the signal waveform rises gently in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate. For example, JP 2014-117505 A (
In particular, as shown in paragraphs 0071 and 0096, FIG. 6), a signal processing unit (output means)
However, a gaming machine is known that can suppress the occurrence of radio interference by deforming and outputting a rectangular wave so that the waveform rises more slowly than the waveform of the rectangular wave.

According to such a gaming machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by causing the waveform of the signal output from the output means to rise gently. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board where the output means is provided is insufficient, and the control signal has sufficient noise resistance to prevent malfunction. There is a possibility that it cannot be increased. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction.

(8) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, movable members 9051 to 905
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating the motor 4, and
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , Luminous body driver 90411, motor driver 90
412 and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H (high).
Set to a low slew rate output state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(9) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, movable members 9051 to 905
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating the motor 4, and
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , Luminous body driver 90411, motor driver 90
412 and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals.
Are transmitted sequentially),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F.
13c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(10) In the gaming machine of (8) or (9) above,
The output means includes specific signal output units grouped into a plurality of different groups (for example,
A specific signal (for example, an output signal from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11) (
For example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 51, groups are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels. ), The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, as shown in FIG. 51, driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q
The output timing of the output signals from 0 to Q11 may be distributed for each group).
According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above,
A drive unit (for example, operation motors 9060A to 9060C) that includes a movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation and operates the movable member is output from a specific signal output unit of the same group of the output unit. Driven on the basis of a specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Also good.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (8) to (11) above,
The output means has a stop function (for example, a time-out function) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the control signal was input (for example, the T terminal is set to H
When set to (High), the timeout function is enabled. See FIG. ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and it is possible to stably control the electrical component.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above,
Control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control microcomputer 90120 performs the production control process (see step S9065)).
By repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is performed. May be executed continuously, or the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be continuously executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

(14) In the gaming machine of (12) or (13) above,
The output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, the T terminal is set to L (
The timeout function is set to an invalid state by setting to (low), and the timeout function is set to an enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. )
It may be configured as follows.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application,
Costs can be reduced by sharing parts.

(15) In any one of the above gaming machines (8) to (14),
The control means is provided on a first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012),
A movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation,
The control means includes
When a first substrate and a second substrate different from the first substrate are connected, based on a signal from detection means (for example, a movable member position sensor 9061) that can detect the state of the movable member. The abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed (see, for example, steps S9058 to S9060 of the production control main process),
When the first board and the second board (for example, the production control relay board 9016A) are in an unconnected state, control is performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member (for example, the production control main process). (See step S9057 and the like).
According to such a configuration, the work efficiency in the manufacturing stage and the development stage can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows examples, such as various control boards mounted in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows random number values MR1-3. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect control command received by the effect control board side, and the processing content performed in a command analysis process according to the received effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of a corresponding | compatible display change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a corresponding | compatible display change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the list of effect production patterns. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect production | presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio in an effect production setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio in an effect production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect production execution process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in case a holding notice effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in case a holding notice effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in the case of the holding notice effect and the effect effect in a modification being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in the case of the holding notice effect and the effect effect in a modification being performed. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect effect in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change pattern determination process in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the time of winning and the final display mode determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the change stage number determination table in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect production | generation setting process in a modification. It is a front view of an example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the case where a several movable member will be in the advance state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a production | presentation movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various circuits etc. which were mounted in the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the memory content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the several light-emitting body which comprises a light-emitting body. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting divided | segmented into a some block. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection setting of a serial output system and a light-emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a light-emitting body driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, and right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for describing each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit illustrated in FIG. 47. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and input / output content. It is a figure which shows the execution example of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of memory inspection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of calculation content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a lighting data generation table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of audio | voice data, and the operation example which reproduces | regenerates a music. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in an upper side mechanism. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in a lower side mechanism.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). 1st special symbol display device 4A
And the second special symbol display device 4B are, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix L
In a special figure game which is composed of ED (light emitting diode) and the like and is an example of a variable display game, a special symbol (also referred to as “special figure”) which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them. The display is variable (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Thereafter, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game. The confirmed special symbol may be different from the special symbol displayed during variable display.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (a pattern in which all LEDs are appropriately turned off may be included as a lighting pattern) in which a combination of an LED to be turned on and a light to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are different from each other What is necessary is just to be preset as a special symbol. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, Fluctuation of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (eg, vertical scroll display)
Is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special symbol game (also referred to as the first special symbol game) using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B.
In synchronism with the special figure game using the second special figure (also referred to as the second special figure game), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be distinguished from each other is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is displayed. Derived display (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols are derived and displayed by stopping display of identification information such as decorative symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating variable display. is there. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HL, a second hold display unit 5HR, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HL displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HR displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game includes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A,
The second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state (advantageous state), the variable corresponding to the established start condition is satisfied. The display is suspended.

For example, when the first start winning that the game ball passes (enters) to the first starting winning opening,
When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the special symbol display device 4A is established, the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition If the first start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, the second special symbol display device 4B causes the second start by the occurrence of the second start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening.
When the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the special figure is established, the second start for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition If the condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is put on hold. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the hold data (holding memory) is digested, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the second When the execution of the special figure game using the special figure is started, the hold data (
(Holding memory) is digested, and the second special figure holding memory number is decremented by one (decrement). If the first special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first starting condition is not satisfied, and the start winning is determined. The special figure game based on it may be invalidated and only the payout of prize balls may be performed. Also, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second starting condition is not satisfied, and the start winning is determined. The special figure game based on it may be invalidated and only the payout of prize balls may be performed.

The variable number of special figure hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is
In particular, it is also called the total number of reserved memories. When simply referring to “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number.
In particular, some of them (for example, the concept including the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excluding the total reserved memory number) may be indicated.

In the first hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. The first hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the first hold display is performed right-justified, for example. The first hold display section 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold number “
It may be associated with “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HL, the hold on the first hold display part 5HL At the rightmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HL, a new first hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HL, and when a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HL While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, another hold number “2”
Each of the first reserved display in the display region corresponding to “4” is moved (shifted) in the direction (right side) of the deleted display region.

In the second hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The second hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the second hold display with left justification, for example. The second hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure hold memory number.
It may be associated with “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”. When the number of holdings of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second holding display part 5HR, the holding in the second holding display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HR, a new second hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HR, when a special game using the second special drawing is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HR While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, another hold number “2”
Each of the second hold display in the display part corresponding to “4” is moved (shifted) in the direction (left side) of the erased display part.

The first hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform the first hold display with right justification,
Although an example has been shown in which the first hold display is shifted to the right side when digested, for example, the first hold display may be configured to be left-justified and shifted to the left side when digested. Similarly, the second hold display unit 5HR is configured so that the second hold display is performed with left justification, and the second hold display shifts to the left side when digested. It may be configured to display the second hold display, and shift to the right side when digested.

The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display section AHA is referred to as active display (also referred to as variable display compatible display, digestion display, or current display). In the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special game using the first special figure when the first start condition is established, the first display unit 5HL erased (digested) the first special game. 1 Active display corresponding to the hold display is performed. In the active display unit AHA, for example, the second
In response to the start of the special game using the second special figure when the start condition is satisfied, an active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) by the second hold display unit 5HR is performed. Is called. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display only need to have colors and patterns in common. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display or the second hold display. It may be.

Since the first hold display and the second hold display are displays corresponding to the variable display to be executed from now on, and the active display is a display corresponding to the variable display being executed, these correspond to the variable display. Also called.

The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1 includes a first hold display section 5HL and a second hold display section 5.
An active display portion AHA is disposed between the HR and the HR. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. It only has to be. Also,
The arrangement of the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR can be arbitrarily changed, for example,
The first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR may be replaced with each other.

Together with the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR, or the first hold display section 5
Instead of the HL and the second hold display section 5HR, a display device for displaying the special figure hold memory number may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, “4”) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number. For example, four LEDs are included. Here, depending on the number of LEDs lit, the number of the first special figure hold memory and the second
The special figure hold memory number is displayed. In some cases, “variable display related information” is used as a term that collectively refers to information corresponding to each of the above-described hold displays (first hold display and second hold display).

Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening (
Closed without entering. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable blade piece is in the tilting position, so that the second
An open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) the start winning opening is made. The normal variable winning ball device 6
B is normally open when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the game ball passes (enters) more than the expanded open state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. ) May be configured to be difficult. Thus, the normal variable winning ball device 6B
Are the first variable state (passing (entry) easy state) such as an open state in which a game ball can pass (entry) through the second start winning opening or an expanded open state, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) Alternatively, it is configured to be able to change to a second variable state (a state in which passage (entry) is difficult (including impossibility of passage (entry))) such as a normal open state in which passage (entry) is difficult. The first variable state is the second
The game ball may be in a state in which the game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening as compared with the variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. Is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value. If so, the second start condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a solenoid 82 for the big winning door shown in FIG.
Is provided with a special prize opening door that is driven to open and close, and the special prize opening door is formed as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example,
Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) into the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening ( More prize balls are paid out than when entering. Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened, the game ball can pass (enter) into the special prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port.
The second state is more disadvantageous for the player than the first state.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. For example, the reserved map display 25C is 4
A passage gate 41 (including a plurality of LEDs) formed in the game area (a game ball is formed by a predetermined member so that the game ball can pass therethrough is detected by the gate switch 21 in FIG. 2). Displays the number of reserved general memory as the number of effective passing balls passed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, there is a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. . In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
Further, a game effect lamp 9 is provided around the game area.
A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. . At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )
An upper plate (a hitting ball supply tray) is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). It has been. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod). ing. The trigger button is operated in a predetermined direction by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 31A.
Should just be provided. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example,
A push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided above the stick controller 31A. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are disposed on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command (such as an effect control command described later) as an example of information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. The main board 1
1 is a variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure by performing on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A function for controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 by controlling on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 It also has. The main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, etc., and displaying various reserved memory numbers.

The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 11.
0, solenoid circuit 111 and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that the passage or entry of game media has been detected (the switch is turned on)) from various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer 100. Transmit to. The solenoid circuit 111 is a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82).
Is transmitted to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and is a relay board 15.
The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L.
, 8R and game effect lamps 9 and various LEDs for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as decoration LEDs are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is a part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R.
It has a function of causing the electrical components for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation of the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED.

The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (sound effect signal) from the effect control board 12, the sound (effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A processing circuit for executing sound signal processing for outputting sound (sound designated by a sound signal) is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (electric decoration signal) from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED A lamp driver circuit or the like that performs lighting / extinguishing driving (lighting / extinguishing according to the drive content indicated by the electrical signal) is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, and the like.
Wiring for transmitting detection signals from various switches is connected. Various switches are
For example, what is necessary is just to have the arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball as a game medium like what is called a sensor. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Further, the main board 11 has a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory.
And a wiring for transmitting a solenoid driving signal for driving the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door.

A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. Production control board 12 from main board 11 via relay board 15
The control command transmitted to is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electrical signal (details will be described later). All the presentation control commands have, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and EXT
The first bit of data may be set in advance so as to be “0”.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer and stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like.
M (Read Only Memory) 101 and RAM (Random) that provides a work area for game control
Access Memory) 102 and a CPU that executes a control program by executing a game control program (
The central processing unit (103) 103, the CPU 103, and a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating random values are provided, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is a ROM 10.
By executing the program read from 1, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) is executed. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. Variable data reading operation for reading out, receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, CP
A transmission operation in which the U 103 outputs various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 is also performed.

It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to include the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 1
01, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104,
The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 may be updated by software by executing a predetermined computer program. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random number value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored.

In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, the pachinko gaming machine 1
Various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the progress of the game in the game are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, for example, even if there is a power failure or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (even if there is a so-called power interruption), the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply supplies the power. Until it is disabled, some or all of the contents of RAM 102 are preserved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data stored in the backup RAM and backed up in this way is appropriately referred to as backup data.

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. The

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, an ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and an effect control CPU.
A RAM 122 that provides 120 work areas, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a CPU 12 for effect control.
A random number circuit 124 for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of 0 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component (predetermined to the effect electric component). Process that realizes the function to execute the production operation)
Is executed. At this time, the production control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 writes the various fluctuation data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the production control CPU 120 uses the RAM.
The variation data reading operation for reading out various variation data temporarily stored in 122, the effect control CPU 120 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects such as a random number for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols, and a random value for determining a notice effect. Controlled.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, for example, effect control execution data (display) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. Control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) and process data including an end code.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation. RAM
Since 122 is not a backup RAM, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (that is, when there is a power interruption), the stored data is lost.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 is based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 by this command), and the image The control content of the display operation in the display device 5 is determined and executed. For example, the display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols and various types of effect display by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control. As an example, the display control unit 123 includes V
DP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM
(Video RAM), LCD drive circuit, etc. need only be installed. VDP is GPU
It may be a graphics processing microprocessor (Graphics Processing Unit), GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a magnetic memory,
What is necessary is just to be comprised using either non-volatile recording media, such as an optical memory.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Port. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED via the lamp control board 14 and the like. Various effects are executed by performing lighting / extinguishing driving at, or displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed,
A predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. The game value given in the gaming machine is directly payout of a game ball to be a prize ball or a score equivalent to this. The record information of the game balls and the score corresponding to the number of the game balls may be any value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game on a gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the gaming machine is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. For example, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probability change state. The maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “16”) larger than the second round number (for example, “2”), and the execution is performed in a short time state. The first upper limit number of possible variable displays is greater than the second number (for example, “50”).
The number of times (for example, “100”), the probability of jackpot in the probability variation state becomes a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50), and the normal state is controlled. The number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state, becomes a first consecutive number of chunks (for example, “10”) larger than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”). It may be included that the game situation becomes more advantageous for the player, such as a part or all.

As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the launch device. When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first start opening switch 2 shown in FIG.
The game ball is detected by 2A (the first start port switch 22A is turned on)
Thus, the first start condition is established. Thereafter, for example, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Be started.

Also, a second start winning opening (second start area) in which game balls are formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.
Is passed (entered), the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. 2 (the second start port switch 22B is turned on). After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state, the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. Be started. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 (the gate switch 21 is turned on), the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol. The usual starting condition for this is established. After that, for example, based on the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied, the general symbol game on the normal symbol display device 20 is started. . In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “
It is "per common figure". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Determined before derivation display (
Pre-determined).

When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is displayed. Derived and displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. First by the first special symbol display device 4A
When a special symbol game using a special symbol or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed, a fixed special symbol that is a variable symbol display result is displayed. In the apparatus 5, a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol,
The variable display result (special drawing display result) becomes “big hit” (specific display result), and is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “7” is a jackpot symbol, and “−”
The special symbol indicating the symbol is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. And a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (
For example, there is a round game (simply referred to as “round”) in which the grand prize opening is continuously opened during the period from when nine game balls enter the big prize opening and the winning ball is generated. Executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the grand prize opening, a winning ball (game ball that has entered the big prize opening) is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are awarded as the prize ball for each detection. To be paid out. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “16”) is reached.

When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” is included. For example, as a variable display result of special symbols,
When the jackpot symbol showing the number “3” is derived and displayed, the jackpot type becomes “non-probable”
When the jackpot symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, the jackpot type becomes “probable change”.
Also, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “1” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “surprise”. When the jackpot type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, as a round game in the big hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big prize opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. The normal open round in which the upper limit time to be a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 29 seconds) is executed a predetermined number of times such as 16 rounds (16 times). In addition, when the big hit type is “surprise”, as the round game in the big hit game state, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (open state with the big winning opening) advantageous to the player Is a normal opening round in which a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 0.5 seconds) is 2 rounds (
2 times). Note that “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable”
The jackpot gaming state based on is referred to as “non-probable big hit gaming state”. Also, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is referred to as “probability big hit game state”. Also,
The big hit gaming state based on the “big hit” when the big hit type is “surprise probability” is referred to as “surprise big hit gaming state”.

After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time-short state, one of the time-short end conditions is one of the fact that the variable display (special game) is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) and the next big hit game state is started. It is controlled to continue until it is established first. Note that the remaining number of executions of variable display (such as a special figure game) until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as a time-save remaining number. The short-time state and the probability variation state are also advantageous for the player.

When a predetermined small hit symbol (for example, “5”) is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes “small bonus”, and the big hit after the big hit gaming state The probability of becoming a small hit that does not change. When it is a small hit, there are 2 big winning mouths in substantially the same opening mode (for example, an opening time of 0.5 seconds) as when it is a sudden big hit.
It is controlled to the small hit gaming state that is in the open state. As a result, the player cannot specify whether it was a small hit or a sudden big hit from the open mode of the big hit game. Also, when a small hit is made, the gaming state is not controlled to the time-saving state. As a result, when the big winning opening is controlled to the open state twice with a small win, it is possible to give the player an impression as if a sudden big hit has occurred. In other words, the small hit can be used as a so-called false big hit that is a sudden big hit.

In this mode, the gaming state after the non-probability big hit gaming state is ended becomes a time-short state but does not become a probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit gaming state is finished is a time reduction state and a probability variation state.

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a gaming state other than a state advantageous for a player such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, etc. The probability of “winning” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening as compared with the non-short-time state that is not in the short time state such as the normal state. Alternatively, the state is changed between an enlarged open state and a second variable state (closed state or normal open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

Time-short states are also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, etc., and game states that are not time-short states are also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, “non-time-short state”, “non-time-short state”, etc. Is called. The probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is “low probability state”, “low probability”, “non-probability variation state”, “non-probability variation”. Is also said. The game state when the probability change state and the time-short state are set are also referred to as “highly accurate and high base state”, “highly accurate and high base”, and the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low-accuracy base state”, “low-accuracy base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The state that cannot be in either the short-time state or the probability variation state, that is, the normal state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

"Left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C provided in the image display device 5
5R, any one of the special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of the figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, after the decorative display variable display is started, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C,
In the period until the variable display is ended by the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern in 5R (the period during the variable display), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode (reach is established).
Sometimes.

Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation design"). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C,
Part of 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.)
Then, when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination (for example, decorative symbols indicating alphanumeric characters of “7”) are stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display areas (for example, “ The display pattern in which the decorative symbols fluctuate in the “decorative” decorative symbol display area 5C, etc., or all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display mode in which the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a background image is displayed, An effect of reproducing and displaying different moving images is executed. These effects are called effects during variable display together with variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the variable display effect is an effect by an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable symbol display itself. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is one of the effects during variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image (including the variable display of the decorative pattern itself) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, effects such as lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included.

In the variable display effect, a reach effect may be executed. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. Reach effects can be achieved by reducing the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern, displaying a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5, or changing the display mode of the background image. It is an effect that performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach mode, by playing a video that is different from the decorative pattern, or by changing the change mode of the decorative pattern. In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9
It may be included that the lighting operation (flashing operation) or the like in the light emitter such as is different from the operation mode before the reach mode. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, super reach B, and rush / small hit exclusive reach are provided as reach effects.

In addition, during variable display of decorative symbols, unlike reach production, variable display of decorative symbols indicates the possibility that the variable display state of decorative symbols will be in the reach state and the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is executed depending on the mode or the like. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design.
It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the variable display production of “Pseudo-ream”, “Left”,
In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of losing combinations predetermined as a pseudo combination chance of a special combination is temporarily displayed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-fluctuated after the decorative symbol is stopped to such an extent that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol once displayed is confirmed.

In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. Thus, the player can recognize that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed by displaying the pseudo-continuous chance temporarily stopped, and the variable display result is increased as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The expectation of becoming a “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed once or twice, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern has been started 2 to 3 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (revariations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be, for example, four times or five times.

When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, for example, the most variable effect may be executed by performing an arbitrary effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “development chance eyes”, “end of development chance eyes”, “after chance eye stop” Various presentation operations such as “slip” may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example,
After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (eg, “1” or “
2 ”), the decorative symbols are changed again in the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R) and then stopped. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. ,"left"
, After temporarily stopping the display of the decorative combination (special combination) that becomes a pseudo-ream chance in all of the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol display area Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of 5L, 5C, and 5R, by changing the decorative symbols again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed.

During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

The presentation operations that are the notice presentation effects are the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C.
After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of 5R, before the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode (in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol is displayed. It may be executed (started) before the temporary stop is displayed. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect is a target for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” (for example)
Prior to the execution of the variable display that is the target of notification), this is a notification effect that can be notified of the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” according to the effect mode. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, the variable display result is “
A production operation for notifying the possibility of “big hit” is started. In this embodiment, as such a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display result may be “big hit” by changing the display mode of the hold display (first hold display, second hold display) of the notice target. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that can be noticed. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that changes the display shape and color of the hold display step by step to a shape and color different from the normal time according to the change pattern according to the type of the background image. It is. In the active display in which the hold display is shifted, the display shape and color may be changed.

In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display subject to notice is started is “single notice effect” (“single notice”, “the relevant notice of change”, or “
This is also referred to as “variable display notice effect”).

In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, an effect that suggests that the display mode changes may be executed. When the action effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes as a result of the action effect. The action effect may include an arbitrary effect operation such as a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. A process for controlling the progress of the game is included. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is set. Thus, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, for a predetermined time (for example, an interval for supplying an interrupt request signal).
Will be executed every 2 milliseconds).

The switch process is performed by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. Whether it is on (
That is, this is a process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered or passed for each switch.

The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

The information output process is, for example, a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. As an example, the main board 11
The game random numbers used on the side need only include the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. (
(See FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “1”. Any of the values of “65535” can be taken. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as “probable change” or “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It can take any value from “100” to “100”. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance. It can take any value of “900”.

In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set as a big hit. Determination of whether or not to control the game state, determination of variation pattern, control of display operation in the special symbol display device 4 based on the determination result (execution of special game), special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state In order to perform the opening / closing operation setting (execution of round game or short-term opening control) of the special prize opening in the predetermined procedure, various processes are selected and executed. Although the details of the special symbol process will be described later, by executing the special symbol process every time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the variation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the determination, and the jackpot gaming state Etc. are realized.

In the normal symbol process, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (for example, when it is determined in the switch process that the gate switch 21 is turned on), the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If there is not, the reserved memory of the usual game (for example, a random number is extracted and RA
M102), determining the variable display result of the normal game using the hold storage (random number stored in the RAM 102), determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the normal game. In accordance with the variation pattern, the display operation on the normal symbol display 20 (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) is controlled to execute variable display of the normal symbol to derive and display the variable display result of the normal game. When the display result is per ordinary figure, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is subjected to a process of setting the first variable state such as an open state. By executing the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the normal game, the first variable state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B at the time of the normal game, etc. are realized.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and the like, transmission setting of a control command (production control command or the like) (for example, storing a storage address value of a control command to be transmitted is stored in the RAM 102) is performed. In the process, a process of actually transmitting the transmission-set control command to the effect control board 12 is performed. In this transmission process, an effect control INT signal or the like is used, and a control command is transmitted.

After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIG. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of a special symbol. In this form, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “01” for the variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of the decorative pattern.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize opening designation command) for designating that a first start prize has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the first start prize opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize opening designation command) for designating that a second start prize has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start prize opening. The first start winning port designation command and the second start winning port designation command may be collectively referred to as a start winning port designation command.

Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command (display result designation command) that designates whether or not to make a big hit and designates the type of big hit, that is, designates a variable display result. In this form, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “00” for “losing”, “big hit” with a big hit type of “probable change”). “0
1 ”).

Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H)
This is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) for designating the start of variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in a later-described variation pattern determination result designation command.

Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result (stopped symbols) is derived and displayed.

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating a game state. In this form, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), “XX” is “0”.
0 "is set. For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, “XX” is “01
"Is set. For example, if the gaming state is a highly accurate high base state, “XX” is “02”.
Set to

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot gaming state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. Command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of the small hit gaming state.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a special prize opening) that designates opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H
) Is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates closing of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.
Command A 602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit gaming state.

Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the first special figure reservation storage number. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as a “special figure pending memory number designation command”.

Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. Command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted when a first start winning or a second starting winning occurs in the process of step S101 described later. The variable display corresponding to the extracted random values MR1 to MR3 can be changed based on the random values MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random values MR1 to MR3 before the variable display start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the display result is “big hit” and the variable display variation pattern (see FIG. 12)
Is determined. The determination at the time of starting winning means these determinations, and is executed in the winning random number determination process in step S213. Note that this determination may not be performed in a predetermined case. A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including the case of no determination) about the display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the symbol designating command (for example, “No determination” 00 ”,“ 01 ”if“ lost ”,“ 02 ”if“ big hit ”, etc.). A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including the case of no determination) regarding the variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the variation pattern designation command (for example, if “no determination”) "11" for "00", "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", "31" for "PB1-1", "61" for "PC1-1""Such).

Next, the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101. When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is ON ( Step S201). When it is determined in the switch process that the first start port switch 22A is on, for example, because the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the CPU 103 displays the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 uses the RAM 10
First special figure reserved memory count that is a stored value of a first special figure reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in two predetermined areas (game control counter setting unit, etc.) It suffices if the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the value. Step S20
2, when it is determined that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit (step S202; N
o) The CPU 103 sets the starting port buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, to “1” (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that the first start-up switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or when it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit (step S202; In Yes), the CPU 103 sets the second start opening switch 22 provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.
It is determined whether or not B is on (step S204). If it is determined in the switch process that the second start port switch 22B is on, for example, because the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 displays the second special drawing. The second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game used is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4
]) Is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103
Second special figure reserved memory count that is a stored value of a second special figure reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 It suffices if the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the value. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value (step S205)
205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to “2” (step S2).
06). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204;
No) or when it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Ye)
In s), the CPU 103 ends the start winning determination process.

After executing either of the processes of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates the special figure reserved memory number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Thus, the first special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). Also, the second special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numerical value MR1, random number MR2 for determining jackpot type, random value M for determining variation pattern
Numerical data (see FIG. 6) indicating R3 is extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. At this time, the CPU 10
3 is the first hold indicator 25A when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit.
The first hold indicator 25 displays a display that can specify the number of the first special figure hold memory number added by one.
A may be performed (for example, the number of lighted LEDs is increased by one). CP
When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the U103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number added by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, increase the number of lighting of LED 1).

The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not started yet, although a game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball CP
U103 extracts random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern as reserved data, and the stored number Is stored until reaching a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).
Thus, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game On-hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on (special drawing display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes stored information.

Note that the hold number in the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled on the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position of the first hold display portion 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display portion 5HL. To do.

The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7B is not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The number data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as the reserved data. The data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached.
Thus, the hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game On-hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on (special drawing display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes stored information.

Note that the hold number in the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled on the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position of the second hold display portion 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display portion 5HR. To do.

After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a start winning opening designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211).
. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory count notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12.
Is set for transmission (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning random number determination process is a process for determining the start winning prize.
Based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 among the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step 209, whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random number value is “big hit” or “small hit”, and This is a process of determining a variable display variation pattern (see FIG. 12). After that, CPU1
03 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S21).
4). At this time, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S214;
“2”), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to “0” (step S215), and ends the start winning determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to “0”. (Step S21
6) The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, the first start port switch 22A and the second
Even when both of the start port switches 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S213 in FIG. 5 as the winning random number determination process. In this mode, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) is set to “big hit” or “small hit” by special symbol normal processing. A determination is made whether to control to the small hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning port (the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port). Whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value (the random value extracted in the process of step S209) is “big hit” or “small hit”, or the variable display of decorative symbols The change pattern is determined (so-called “look ahead”). Thereby, before the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the special game start condition is established)
In addition, it is pre-read that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-read result, the side of the effect control board 12 Thus, the display mode or the like of the hold display can be determined by the production control CPU 120 or the like.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG.
Check the status of the time-saving flag (the flag that is turned on when the time is short) and the probability change flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability is changed) provided in the predetermined area 02 (game control flag setting unit, etc.) Thus, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S301). The CPU 103 confirms the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102, thereby, for example, pachinko gaming machine 1
It is specified whether or not the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” to “7”, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified as the big hit gaming state.

Subsequent to the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the identified gaming state is a big hit in which a big hit gaming state is set (step S302). When it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not it is in the high base where the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). ). When it is determined that the high base is being used (step S303; Yes)
) Or when it is determined in step S302 that the game is a big hit (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the start port buffer value is “2” (step S304). When it is determined that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S304; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S304; Yes)
Alternatively, if it is determined in step S303 that the high base is not being used (step S303; No), the CPU 103 causes the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure shown in FIGS. From the figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current game state is selected (step S305).

Following the processing of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). For example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The presence or absence of a decision value that matches MR1 may be determined. Alternatively, the minimum of the decision values included in the jackpot decision range (
A numerical value indicating a lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) is set, and the CPU 103 compares the random value MR1 with the minimum value or the maximum value of the jackpot determination range, so that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. It may be determined whether it is within. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

Note that in the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 executes step S210.
The random number value MR1 stored in the special figure storage unit may be read out, and the above determination may be made using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 separates the random value M from step S210.
R1 may be held in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure storage unit) or the storage area of the CPU 103, and the above determination may be performed based on the held random number value. The same applies to a random value MR3 described later. Thus, the random value used in the winning random number determination process may not be the random value stored in the special figure storage unit.

When it is determined in step S307 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S307)
307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The jackpot type determination table data is selected from the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The CPU 103 refers to the selected jackpot type determination table data to determine which of the multiple jackpot types is determined.

Subsequent to the processing in step S308, the CPU 103 selects a later-described jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13) prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the usage table (step S309). . The big hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of the determination value. In the actual table, it suffices if a determined value in a range corresponding to the determined ratio in FIG. 13 is assigned to each variation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of values that the random number MR3 can take is 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the big hit type is probabilistic / non-probable, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the fluctuation pattern PB1- Since the decision ratio of 3 is 70,
Determination values 1 to 45 (range of 5%) to be compared with the random number value MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern PB1-1, and determination values 46 to 27 to be compared with the random value MR3 are allocated to the variation pattern PB1-2.
0 (25% range) is assigned, and the decision values 271 to 900 (70% range) to be compared with the random value MR3 are assigned to the variation patterns PB1-3. Such determination value assignment is the same for other tables in which determination ratios are described.

When it is determined in step S307 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S307)
307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S310). The CPU 103 executes step S3
In the special figure display result determination table selected by the process 05, the random number MR1 is obtained by executing the same process as the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. It is only necessary to determine whether or not is within the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that it is within the range of the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), R in advance
Small hit variation pattern determination table (for example, stored in a predetermined area of the OM 101)
13B) is selected and set in the usage table (step S312). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is “small hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern. .

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not within the range of the small hit determination range (step S310; No),
A loss variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 13C and 13D) prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in the use table (step S31).
1). Specifically, when the current gaming state identified in step S301 is a non-short-time state (low base state) (when the short-time flag is off), the loss variation pattern determination table of FIG. When the current gaming state set in the usage table is the short-time state (high base state) specified in step S301 (when the short-time flag is on), FIG.
The loss variation pattern determination table of D) is set as the use table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is “lost”, and a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot variation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 extracted in step S209. The random number MR3 with reference to any one of the table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, and the loss variation pattern determination table
The variation pattern assigned to the determined value that matches is determined (step S313).
The CPU 103, for example, determines the individual decision values assigned to each variation pattern and the random value MR.
3 may be compared to determine the variation pattern by determining the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random number MR3, or the minimum value of decision values assigned to each variation pattern ( A numerical value indicating a lower limit value and a maximum value (upper limit value) may be set, and the CPU 103 may determine the variation pattern by comparing the random value MR3 with the minimum value or the maximum value of the determined value.

After executing one of the processes in steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the start winning command having the contents corresponding to the determination result in step S308 and step S313 (step S314), and the random number value determining process in winning Exit. The start winning time command includes a start winning opening designation command, a special figure reserved memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. The start port buffer value is “1”
”, The transmission setting of the first start prize opening designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command is set as the start prize command. Do. When the start port buffer value is “2”, the second start winning port designation command, the second special figure reserved memory number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are designated as commands for starting prizes. Command and send settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command to be set for transmission are:
A command for specifying the current first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number (a command including EXT data corresponding to the memory number) is used. What is necessary is just to specify with the count value of a memory | storage number counter or a 2nd special figure reservation memory | storage number counter. When the determination result in step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol designation command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is “big hit” (“big hit”). If the determination result in step S307 is the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command (" A command including EXT data corresponding to “small hit”, and when the determination result in step S310 is not the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a command for designating that the determination result of the variable display result is “losing” (Command including EXT data corresponding to “losing”), and determination in step S303 When fruit is starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S304;
No), a command for designating that “no judgment” has not been made at the time of start winning (
A command including EXT data corresponding to “no determination”. The variation pattern determination result designation command to be set for transmission is a command (command including EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern which is the determination result) for designating the variation pattern which is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313. When the determination result of step S304 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), a command ("corresponding to" no determination "" for designating that "no determination" has not been made at the start winning determination. Command including data).

In the winning random number determination process, as described above, the random value M extracted in step S209 this time.
Regarding the variable display corresponding to R1 to R3, the variable display result of the variable display (special game) is “
Whether or not “big hit” or “small hit” is determined, and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 13) is determined, and so-called prefetching is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed, so the determination is not necessarily accurate, but to some extent Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. In the winning random number determination process, step S302 is performed.
Whether or not the start port buffer value is “2” by the process of step S304 based on the determination that the big hit is determined in the process of step S304, or the determination that the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S303. Determine. At this time, the start port buffer value is “1” and “2”.
If not, the process proceeds to the process of step S314 without executing the process of step S305 or the like, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control associated with the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit game state, each of the above-mentioned each is based on the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) due to the game ball entering the first start winning opening. Limit the decision not to be made. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is given during the time-saving control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the prefetch based on the game from being executed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 performs steps S110 to S120 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. Select one of the processes to execute.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result,
It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is RAM 10
The big hit type is stored by being stored in the big hit type buffer provided in two predetermined areas (for example, the game control buffer setting unit). Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 shown in FIG. When the special symbol normal process is started, the CPU 103 first performs the second process.
It is determined whether or not the special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

When it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the CPU 103, for example, the first area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the reservation number “1”). As storage data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as a storage area corresponding to “”, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read (step S23).
2). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the processing in step S232, the CPU 103 updates the second special figure reserved memory number to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure reserved memory number count value by one, and the like. The content stored in the second special figure storage unit is shifted (step S2).
33). For example, the reservation data stored in the storage area lower than the holding number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit is higher by one entry (
Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, to “2” (step S2).
34).

When it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231: Yes). Step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not.
Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

When it is determined in step S235 that the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S235; No), for example, the first area of the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the reservation number “
Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a storage area corresponding to “1”) (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) at the first start winning opening in the process of step S236 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the CPU 103 updates the first special figure reserved memory number to be decremented by 1, for example by subtracting and updating the first special figure reserved memory number count value by one, and the like. The contents stored in the first special figure holding storage unit are shifted (step S2).
37). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time (
Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, the ROM 101 is previously stored.
The special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in the predetermined area is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 103 sets the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 as a use table. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit” and “lost”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not the game state is the probability variation state.

The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the variation random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variation random number buffer, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table based on whether or not there is and numerical data indicating the random value MR1, the random value MR1
Depending on whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state that matches the decision value, the decision result of the assigned “big hit”, “small hit” or “losing” is decided as the special figure display result do it.

In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10A and a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. It is prepared. The first special figure display result determination table displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether to control the small hit game state as the “small hit” based on the random display value MR1 for determining the special figure display result This is a table that is referred to. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine.

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10A, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10B, the special figure depends on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the short-time state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

In the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “
It is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as “big hit”. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), it is more than the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. Thereby, the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1
Then, as compared with the normal state or the short-time state (low-probability state), the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is controlled is increased. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, it is a big hit compared to the normal state and the short time state The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined when controlling to the gaming state is increased.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, the predetermined range of determination values (“30000” to “30000”
30100 ”) is assigned to the special chart display result of“ small hit ”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table, no determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. The percentage determined to control to the small hit gaming state as "small hit",
Can be different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, since it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled, for example, a short time state (low probability high base state) or In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, such as a probability variation state (high probability high base state), frequent small hit gaming states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to the extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. . For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller decision value than the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state is used. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result is determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table and determining the special figure display result. A decision may be made.

Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “
It is determined whether or not it is “big hit” (step S240). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 to an on state (step S241). C
The PU 103 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10C as a use table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10C, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change” and “ It is only necessary to be assigned to “Accuracy”.

The CPU 103 reads out the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the big hit read from the random number buffer for variation Random value M for determining type
By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating R2, any of the jackpot types to which the determined value matching the random value MR2 is assigned may be selected.

FIG. 10C shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It is a table that is referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, a special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (first
It is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol display device 4B)
Depending on whether the game is a special game), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a plurality of big hit types such as "non-probable change", "probable change", and "surprise change" Assigned.

In the setting example of the big hit type determination table, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variation special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “70” to “99”)
Is assigned to the jackpot type of “Accuracy”, while the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure,
No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of “Accuracy”. With these settings,
A case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied;
The case where the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the special symbol display device 4B is established. The ratio determined to be “accurate” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball is avoided, and the deterioration of the game interest due to the extended game is prevented. it can.

Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determined values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

After executing the process of step S242, the CPU 103 stores the jackpot type (step S243). The CPU 103 stores a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 (for example, “0” in the case of “non-probable change”). ”And“ 1 ”in the case of“ probability change ”), the jackpot type may be stored.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), CP
U103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S244).
When it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S244; Yes), the CPU
103 sets the small hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 to an ON state (
Step S245).

After executing the process of step S243, after executing the process of step S245, or when determining that the special figure display result is not “small hit” in the process of step S244 (
In any one of steps S244; No), the CPU 103 determines a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game (step S246). For example, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103
In accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in step S242 (according to the jackpot type buffer setting value), one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of jackpot symbols is determined as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 determines one of the special symbols predetermined as the small hit symbol as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S244 that the special symbol display result is not “small hit”, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol.

After executing the processing of step S246, the CPU 103 sets the value of the special figure process flag to “
1 "(step S247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

In the process of step S235, the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0”.
If it is determined that it is (step S235; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), and then ends the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the control board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, after setting the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG.
It is executed when “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time (special diagram variation time) from the start of variable symbol special display until the finalized special symbol resulting in variable display is derived is determined. Is done. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S262). When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in an off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in an on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (
In step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S265).

  FIG. 12 shows a specific example of the variation pattern.

The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time is normal. This is a non-reach variation pattern of length.

The variation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, designates non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time than usual. This is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for short time.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern PA2-2
Is a reach variation pattern that is selected when the variable display result is “losing” and designates execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach B.

The fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern PB1-2
Is a reach variation pattern that is selected when the variable display result is “big hit” and designates execution of super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach B.

The variation pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”, and designates non-reach. Non-reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and when the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of reach. here,
The reach / small hit-only reach is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is a sudden big hit or a small hit. The decorative pattern for the big hit is a pattern in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as “3”, “5”, and “7”. The small hitting decorative pattern is a state in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is stopped and displayed with “2”, “4”, and “6”.

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13A stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby the variation assigned to the determination value that matches the random value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In FIG. 13A,
The ratio of determination is described instead of the determined value.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 11, for example, a variation pattern at the time of small hit is determined using the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13B stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. . As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 is assigned to a decision value that matches the random value MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In FIG. 13, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value. In FIG. 13B, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, for example, using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13C and 13D that is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101,
A variation pattern at the time of losing is determined. When the gaming state is the non-time-short state (the time-short flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When the gaming state is the short time state (the short time flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in each loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby the variation assigned to the determination value that matches the random value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In FIGS. 13C and 13D, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

In the loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 13C and 13D, the variation pattern PA1-2 having a short special diagram variation time is easily selected in the short-time state, and the average is larger than that in the non-short-time state. The variable display time can be shortened, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings can be suppressed, and the stoppage of the game ball by the player (so-called “stopping”) can be reduced.
Moreover, the execution frequency of variable display can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 13, at the big hit (probability / non-probability), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 for executing the super reach B is the highest, the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 of the super reach A, and the fluctuation of the normal reach. The determination ratio is gradually decreased in the order of the pattern PB1-1. At the time of losing, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, the normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, the super reach A fluctuation pattern PA2-2, and the super reach B. The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. From this, when the super reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes “big hit” at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” (so-called big hit expectation) decreases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, at the time of big hit (probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PC1-2 of the accuracy / small hit reach is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of the abrupt / small hit reach. From this,
When the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is executed, the variable display result tends to be “big hit (surprise)”, and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, the variable display result is It tends to be a “small hit”.

After executing any one of steps S262, S264, and S265, the CPU 103
Sets a special figure variation time (also referred to as a variation time) that is a variable symbol display time (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting a special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and S265. For the setting of the special figure fluctuation time, for example, the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time is set to R
This is performed by setting a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the AM 102.

Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Thereby, a special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. Let the hold indicator 25B perform (for example, the number of LED lighting is 1
May be reduced).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 sends a special symbol change start command (change start command) to notify the effect control board 12 of the special figure display result, the change pattern determination result, and the like. Transmission setting is performed (step S268). For example,
When the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first fluctuation start designation command and a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S262) as a fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Or EX indicating the variation pattern determined in S263
Command including T data), display result designation command (command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S244), first special figure reserved memory number designation command (first special figure hold reduced by 1 in step S237) A transmission setting for sequentially transmitting a memory number count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by starting execution of the special figure game is performed. On the other hand, the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”.
The CPU 103 sends a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (step S2) as a variation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.
62 or a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in S263), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in Step S244), a second special figure reserved storage number specifying command (Step The second special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in S233, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory count when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special figure game) Send settings for sending to.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 sets the value of the special figure process flag to “
After updating to “2” (step S267), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S267, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

In the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4, the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”.
Executed when. This special symbol variation process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer. Then, when the timer value of the game control process timer (the timer value after subtracting 1) is not 0, the special figure variation time has not elapsed, so control for executing variable display of the special figure game (for example, the first 1st special symbol display device by performing a control to transmit a display signal of 1 special figure or 2nd special figure (including an update for maintaining the display of special symbols for a predetermined time as appropriate). 4A or second special symbol display device 4B
The process for changing the special symbol is performed at, and the special symbol changing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display In the device 4B, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110) that is the variable symbol display result is stopped (derived display) (the fixed special symbol is displayed for a predetermined time). In addition, when the display is stopped, the symbol confirmation designation command is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit flag is on. When the big hit flag is in the on state, the CPU 103 makes settings for ending the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state. For example, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are reset (turned off) and provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.
Processing is performed to set the count value of the short time counter to “0” to count the count value of the short time counter that counts the remaining number of times of variable display (remaining short time) that is executed during the short time state. Then, a timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time (the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set as an initial value in the game control process timer. Then, “16” is set as an initial value in a round number counter provided in the RAM 102 for counting round games. Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a hit start designation command and a gaming state designation command (in this case, a command to designate the normal state) for designating the current gaming state, and the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. The special symbol stop process is terminated. Since the gaming state is changed after the big hit gaming state, it is not necessary to transmit a gaming state designation command here.

When the big hit flag is in the off state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state. Is a waiting time until the execution of the production corresponding to the start of the hit gaming state is started, which is a predetermined time), and the special hit display result is “small hit” Transmission setting of a small hitting start designation command (effect control command) which is a control command for designating the start of the gaming state is performed, and the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is in the off state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to end a special game state such as a probability change state or a time saving state. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is in an on state. If the time reduction flag is in an on state, the CPU 103 subtracts “1” from the count value of the time reduction number counter. It is determined whether the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”, and the count value is “0”.
”Because the time-short end condition for ending the time-short state has been satisfied (that is, a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-short state has been executed). Is turned off. After that, based on the current gaming state, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command (in this case, a command for designating a highly accurate low base state) is performed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit release pre-processing, for example, the timer value of the game control process timer is set to 1.
Subtract. If the timer value after the subtraction is not “0”, the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the big hit release pre-processing ends. Timer value after subtraction is “0”
In this case, the fanfare waiting time has passed, and the round game start timing has come. In this case, the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the grand prize opening (for example, the process of transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door), the big prize opening For example, processing for setting a timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the period for setting the game control process timer to the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This big hit release process includes a process for subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, and a count switch 2 in one round game.
3 based on the number of game balls detected by 3 (which may be counted by a counter (provided in the RAM 102) that counts 1 each time the count switch 23 is determined to be in the ON state by the switch process). A process of determining whether or not it is time to return the mouth from the open state to the closed state (or may be partially open) is included.

When it is determined that the timer value after subtraction of 1 has reached 0, or the number of detected game balls (count value of the counter) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9), Since it is time to close, the process of returning the prize winning opening to the closed state (for example, the process of stopping transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning door and turning off the solenoid 82), Processing to set the timer value corresponding to the closing period of the big prize opening (a round game interval period, a preset period) in the game control process timer, processing to subtract the count value of the round number counter, etc. Executed. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big prize opening (for example, the solenoid drive signal Etc.), and the process during the big hit release is completed. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state.

The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, there are processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become “0”, and processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it is not “0”. Done.

If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times, so the ending waiting time (
A timer value corresponding to a waiting time from the start to the end of the ending in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set in the game control process timer. Also,
A setting to send a hit end designation command is performed, and processing for updating the special figure process flag to “7” is also performed.

When the process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If not, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained, and the processing after the big hit release ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the process for opening the big winning opening and the period for opening the big winning opening. A process for setting the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

Every time a timer interrupt occurs, S115 after the big prize opening is opened in step S114,
Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S116.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not ended, and the jackpot end processing is ended as it is. If the timer value reduced by 1 reaches 0,
Since the ending is completed, states such as a time reduction flag, a time reduction number counter, a probability variation flag, etc. are set according to the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer.

For example, if the big hit type is “probability change”, the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are turned on, and “100” is set as a count initial value in the time reduction counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. If the big hit type is “non-probable change”, only the time reduction flag is turned on, and “100” is set as the count initial value in the time reduction counter. If the big hit type is “surprise”, only the probability variation flag is turned on. In the jackpot end processing, after such setting, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state corresponding to the setting is performed, and various data such as a gaming control process timer and a jackpot type buffer setting value (next value) If the variable display is not carried over to the variable display), the special process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit release pre-processing includes the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” and the timing for opening the big prize opening (for example, the small hit start start waiting time set above) And the like, and the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time after the open state is included. In addition, in the small hit opening pre-processing, for example, the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds” in the same manner as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. ”Or the like is set to the small hit gaming state. When a process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”. By repeatedly executing step S118, the standby state is controlled until the special winning opening is opened.

The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process of determining whether or not it is time to return the mouth from the open state to the closed state (or may be partially open), and the timing to return the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball (The timing when either the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S118)
In the case where it is determined that the winning prize opening is closed, the process of returning the winning prize opening to the closed state is included. And when returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, a process for determining whether or not the number of times of opening has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or a timing when the grand prize opening is returned to the closed state when the upper limit number is not reached A process for measuring the elapsed time from the time, a process for opening the special winning opening again when the measured elapsed time reaches a preset time, and the like are executed. When the number of times of opening the big winning opening reaches the upper limit number, a setting is made to transmit a small hit end designation command which is a control command for notifying that the small hit gaming state has ended, and the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. Is updated. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed. Step S118 is repeatedly executed, and step S119 is repeatedly executed to realize the small hit gaming state.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. This includes a process of waiting until it elapses (ending the small hit end process until the waiting time elapses). Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

When the production control board 12 is supplied with a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the production control CPU
120 starts and executes a predetermined effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is turned on. For example, the timer interrupt flag is set based on a CTC register setting for a predetermined time (for example,
It is set to the on state every time 2 milliseconds). At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is, for example, RAM
It is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided at 122. Then, C for production control
The PU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis processing, for example, after the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer are read, the read effect control commands are read out. Settings and control corresponding to are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.
Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is performed, and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. Thereafter, it is determined again whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning prize designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether there has been (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command is received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When a first start winning port designation command or a first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (first start winning mouth designation command, first special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) in the RAM 12
2 is stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area. When a second start winning port designation command or a second special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start winning mouth designation command, second special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) in the RAM 12
2 is stored in a second start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area.

FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the first start winning command buffer. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning reception command received at the first start winning is stored. In the first start winning command buffer, a storage area (corresponding to each of the hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold memory number (for example, 4) Area) is provided.

When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening, four commands of a first start prize opening designation command, a first special figure hold storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command are set to 1 The set effect control command (start winning prize command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the first start winning command buffer,
In addition to the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information can be stored in association with each hold memory information. Storage area is secured.

The effect control CPU 120 stores data for specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the first start winning command buffer in accordance with the receiving order. The empty area of the command buffer at the first start winning prize, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0”.
000 (H) ". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest hold display number in which the start winning command storage area is all “0000 (H)” in the first start winning command buffer. Storage area to
Each effect control command data is stored in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

The first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each hold display number, and a storage area for storing a corresponding display change pattern to be described later. . The corresponding display change pattern is a type indicating a change (transition) in the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the corresponding display change pattern is “0”, the hold notice effect is not executed, so the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display is the normal mode (white). It will not change. In addition, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers and a storage area for storing an effect pattern to be described later. The action effect pattern is a pattern of the effect mode effect mode that is executed before the display mode of the corresponding display such as the hold display and the active display is changed when the hold notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the action effect pattern is “0”, the action effects other than the effect effect of the gusset are not executed.

FIG. 15B is a configuration example of the second start winning command buffer. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning reception command received at the second start winning is stored. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area (in the number of various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure reservation storage number)
Areas corresponding to each of the hold display numbers 1 to 4 are provided.

When there is a start prize at the second start prize opening, four commands of a second start prize designation command, a second special figure hold storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command are set to 1 The set effect control command (start winning prize command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the second start winning command buffer,
In addition to these second start winning prize designation command, second special figure hold memory designation command, symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information can be stored in association with each hold memory information. Storage area is secured.

The effect control CPU 120 stores data for specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the second start winning command buffer in accordance with the receiving order. The empty area of the second start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0”.
000 (H) ". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest hold display number in which the start winning command storage area is all “0000 (H)” in the second start winning command buffer. Storage area
Each effect control command data is stored in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Similarly to the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each hold display number, and a corresponding display change pattern to be described later. A storage area for storing is provided. The display change pattern corresponding to the hold display number “4” shown in FIG. 15B stores “PT4-XX”, and the hold notice effect for the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”. Indicates that it will be executed. The second start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing the action effect pattern.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 14, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the start winning command is not received (step S4).
01; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the gaming state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received gaming state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-accuracy flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the probability-changing state. Corresponding to the switching of the on state / off state, the on state / off state is switched. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the short-time state.
The on / off state is switched in response to switching of the ON / OFF state of the 1-side short-time flag. For example, when the game state designation command designates the high-accuracy high-base state (for example, designates that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are on), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the high-probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if the flag is already on, the on state is maintained. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and high base Turn off the flag. When the gaming state designation command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn off.

After executing step S404, or when determining that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing Exit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the process performed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item “processing content” shown in FIG. 16 is, for example, the processing executed in step S405. Further, the step number indicated in the item “processing content” indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 14 and means that the corresponding step processing is executed. In addition, each reception flag and each storage area indicated in the item “processing content” are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Setting the reception flag means turning on.

For example, when the received effect control command is a variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation pattern command reception flag.

For example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display setting process (step S161).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hold display setting process. When the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 18 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step S501). When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S501; Yes), the production control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory number addition designation command received in the low base state, or the high It is determined whether or not it is any of the second reserved memory number addition designation commands received in the base state (
Step S502). In this mode, by executing the processing of step S502, the hold notice effect can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning opening 13 in the low base state, and in the high base state. The hold notice effect can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning at the second start winning opening 14. In this embodiment,
For example, when the hold notice effect is already being executed, it is determined to be No in S502, thereby further controlling to not execute the hold notice effect.

When it is determined that it is either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step S502;
Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of holds (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number) has become 3 or more due to the current winning (step S503). In step S503, it is determined whether or not the first special figure hold memory number is 3 or more in the low base state, and whether or not the second special figure hold memory number is 3 or more in the high base state. Good.
It should be noted that the number of reserves is the first special figure reserved memory number designation command when the first start winning prize designation command is received in step S502, and the second number when the second start prize designation designation command is received. It may be specified by referring to the 2 special figure reserved memory number designation command.

When it is determined that the number of holds is 3 or more (step S503; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display mode) of the corresponding display such as the hold display and the active display, and the final display mode. A corresponding display change pattern that is an effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display step by step (holding notice effect) is determined (step S504).
). That is, in this embodiment, when the number of holds is 3 or more, the hold notice effect is executed. In step S504, a pattern that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display is determined, and when the number of holds is 3 or more, the hold notice effect may not be executed. Even when the second reserved memory count addition designation command received in the high base state is received, the high base state (short time state) ends before the target changes and becomes the low base state. May not execute the hold notice effect.

Even when the number of holds is less than 3, the hold notice effect may be made executable. Also,
A plurality of hold notice effects may be executed in parallel.

Further, in this embodiment, a notice effect (hold notice effect) in which the display mode of the hold display and the active display is changed is executed, but only when the hold display or the active display is performed. The notice effect that the display mode changes may be executed. And this invention may be applied in such a notice effect.

In step S504, first, a final display mode of correspondence display is determined. For example, referring to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 according to the variable display result and the variable pattern of the variable display, the corresponding display (active display) at the determination ratio shown in FIG. ) To determine the final display mode. The production control CPU 12
For 0, the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display may be acquired by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern judgment result designation command included in the start winning command.

Next, determination of the final display stage of the hold display will be specifically described. The final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 is a table for determining in advance the final display mode (final display mode) of the corresponding display change (transition) in the hold notice effect. As shown in FIG. 19, the final display mode determination table sets the final display mode (display color) to “white”, “blue”, “green”, “green” for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). A determination ratio for determining either “red” or “rainbow” is assigned. More specifically, the variable display result is divided into “big hit (16R)”, “big hit (surprise)”, “losing (super reach)”, and “other than the above”, and each is prepared as a final display mode. "White", "Blue", "Green"
, “Red” and “Rainbow” are assigned different determination ratios.

“White” in FIG. 19 is a display mode (normal mode) when the hold notice effect is not executed. That is, in FIG. 19, when the final display mode is determined to be “white”, the hold notice effect is not executed (the display mode of the corresponding display does not change). “Blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” in FIG. 19 are display modes (notice modes) when the hold notice effect is executed. Note that the timing at which the display mode changes is the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the hold display was shifted and the hold display was shifted (after the change started), or after the hold display was shifted to the active display. It is the timing when a predetermined time has passed. Note that the timing at which the display mode changes is not limited to these, and may be any timing during the change or at the end of the change. For example, as the change timing, at the start of change, before each decorative symbol is stopped (during high-speed fluctuation), when each decorative symbol is stopped, reach, and at the time of development to super reach (multiple during hold display and active display) ), During the reach of Super Reach, etc. In addition, it may be changed corresponding to the operation means such as the push button 31B being operated, or in the case of a pseudo-series variation pattern, it changes during each re-variation or during each re-variation of the pseudo-series. It is good also as timing.

In the hold notice effect, the ratio of big hits in the order of “rainbow”>“red”>“green”> “blue” (big hit reliability) and the percentage of super reach (super reach reliability) are high, and the big hit The degree of advantage is also high. Further, when the display mode is “rainbow”, it is determined that 16R big hit will be made. In this embodiment, the display color of the display mode of the corresponding display is changed in the hold notice effect, but the shape, size, pattern, etc. may be changed.

In addition, when the display mode is “rainbow”, it is determined that it will be a big hit, but it may not be decided that it will be a big hit. Further, the big hit including the accuracy may be determined. The determination ratio of the final display mode may be arbitrary as long as it can be notified that the display mode is likely to be advantageous to the player.

After determining the final display mode with reference to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 in step S504, the specific display mode in the hold notice effect is determined based on the determined final display mode and the number of holds. A corresponding display change pattern corresponding to the change is determined.
Specifically, a corresponding display change pattern determination table for determining the corresponding display change pattern is selected in accordance with the determined final display mode and the number of pending. In this embodiment, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 9, nine types of corresponding display change pattern determination tables 1 to 9 corresponding to the final display mode and the number of reservations are prepared. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns in which change timing and change stage (intermediate display mode) are set in advance so as to finally change to the final display mode are provided. It is determined to be one of a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 that is selected when the final display mode is “red” and the number of holds is “4” as an example of the corresponding display change pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 21, in the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7, at the time of winning,
Hold display number 3, hold display number 2, hold display number 1, display mode in active display (
A plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns each having a predetermined display mode are set. At the time of winning a prize, the display mode corresponding to the corresponding display change pattern is displayed, and when the display mode becomes different from each hold display number and the active display, the display mode changes to the display mode corresponding to the corresponding display change pattern. .

For example, the corresponding display change pattern PT4- in the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 is used.
4-1 indicates that the hold display is displayed as “white” at the time of winning, and “shifted to active display”
The corresponding display change pattern changes to “red”. The corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-21 is displayed with “blue” on hold when winning, changes to “green” when shifted to hold display number 1, and changes to “red” when shifted to active display. It is a corresponding display change pattern which changes. What is necessary is just to determine in any of such a several types of corresponding | compatible display change pattern. In FIG. 21, the determination ratio is not shown, but it may be determined at random, for example, the corresponding display change pattern may be determined based on the variable display result. For example, various reliability levels (big hit reliability, reach reliability, and big hit advantage) may be different depending on the number of changes and the change timing. By doing so, the player pays attention not only to the final display mode, but also to the number of changes and the change timing. The determined corresponding display change pattern is stored in the corresponding location in the start winning command buffer shown in FIG.

In the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 shown in FIG. 21, the number of changes is indicated for each corresponding display change pattern. An action effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined according to the number of changes.

Here, only the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 is shown, but in the other corresponding display change pattern determination tables, a plurality of types of corresponding display patterns are set and any one of them can be determined. Good. As shown in FIG. 20, the corresponding display change pattern determination table 1 is a table that is selected when the final display mode is “white”. Therefore, it remains “white” from winning to active display. Only the corresponding display change pattern is set.

In step S504, after determining the final display mode and the corresponding display change pattern,
An action effect pattern is determined (step S505). In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the effect image (action effect image) is moved with respect to the hold display after being shifted and displayed with the digestion of the hold memory. The effect effect in which the effect image acts (interferes) is executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the display mode may change as a result of the effect. By doing so, the player pays attention to the action effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, action effects A and action effects B are executed as action effects. When the action effect B is executed, the display state of the hold display is surely changed, and when the action effect A is executed, the hold display may not be changed. In other words, the action effect A (action effect A gaset) that only gives the player's expectation can be executed. In this embodiment, the action effect A is an effect in which the bomb image acts on the hold display or the active display, and the action effect B is an effect in which the arrow image acts on the hold display or the active display. In addition, the effect aspect of an effect effect is not limited to this, You may be arbitrary effect aspects. The action effect A gaze is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation level.

In this embodiment, when the action effect B is executed, the display mode of the hold display is surely changed. However, the display mode of the hold display may not change with a low probability. (There may be an action effect B gas). For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changed with higher probability when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, a plurality of types of action effect patterns corresponding to which action effect is executed at each stage (holding display number, active display) according to the number of changes in the corresponding display. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 22, according to the number of changes, 14 types of action effect patterns in which action effect A and action effect B are combined are provided. In step S505, any action effect pattern may be determined according to the number of changes in the corresponding display change pattern determined in step S504. For example, step S
If the action effect pattern PT4-4-1 shown in FIG.
Since the number of times of change is one, the action effect pattern STP1-1 or STP1-2 is determined. When the effect production pattern PT4-4-21 shown in FIG.
Therefore, it is determined as one of the action effect patterns STP2-1 to STP2-4. FIG.
When the action effect pattern PT4-4-41 shown in FIG. 1 is determined, since the number of changes is three, it is determined as one of the action effect patterns STP3-1 to STP3-8. The determined action effect pattern is stored in a corresponding location or the like in the start winning command buffer.

In FIG. 22, the determination ratio is not shown, but it may be determined at random,
For example, the action effect pattern may be determined based on the variable display result. For example, depending on the number of appearances of the action effect A or the action effect B, various reliability levels (big hit reliability, reach reliability, and big hit advantage) may be different. By doing so, the player pays attention not only to the final display mode but also to which action effect is executed.

Moreover, you may vary the determination ratio of an effect production pattern according to the determined corresponding | compatible display change pattern. For example, even if the number of changes and the final display mode are the same and the corresponding display change pattern, the action effect determination ratio may be varied depending on the number of change stages. Specifically, "white →
If the pattern changes from “white → green → green → red”, it changes in two steps at the first change and changes in one step in the next change, so that the action effect pattern becomes action effect B → action effect A. Make it easier to decide. If the pattern changes from “white → blue → blue → red → red”, the first change is 1
Since the stage changes and the next stage changes in two stages, it may be easy to determine the action effect pattern of action effect A → action effect B (or action effect A and action effect B may be reversed). ). By doing in this way, according to the type of action effect, it is possible to vary the rate of change in multiple stages, the player will pay attention to which action effect is executed, and the interest of the game improves.

In the action effect pattern shown in FIG. 22, each action effect pattern includes an action effect B.
The number of executions of is shown. In this embodiment, an effect corresponding to the remaining number of times of the effect effect B is executed. Details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the action effect is executed at least for the number of changes of the corresponding display. In other words, the action effect is always executed when the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the display mode of the corresponding display changes without accompanying the effect.

Returning to the description of the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 18, in the process of step S <b> 502, the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state and the second start prize receiving command received in the high base state.
When it is determined that it is neither of the start winning port designation commands (step S502; No)
When it is determined in step S503 that the number of holds is less than 3 (step S503; No)
) Since the holding notice effect is not executed, the corresponding display change pattern that remains “white” from the time of winning to the active display is determined (step S506). Here, it corresponds to not executing the hold notice effect at the corresponding part in the command buffer at the time of start winning shown in FIG.
“0” is stored.

After executing the process of step S505 or S506, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first hold display part of the display screen of the image display device 5 according to the corresponding display change pattern determined in the process of step S505 or step S506. The corresponding display (first hold display or second hold display) is additionally displayed on 5HL or the second hold display section 5HR (step S509).
.

After performing the process of step S509, or when it is determined in the process of step S501 that the start winning command has not been received (step S501; No), the effect control CPU 120 has received the change start designation command or not. (Step S510)
). Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the variation start designation command by referring to whether or not either the first variation start designation command reception flag or the second variation start designation command reception flag is set, for example. What is necessary is just to determine. When it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step S510; No), the effect control CPU 12
0 ends the hold display setting process.

On the other hand, when it determines with having received the change start designation | designated command (step S510; Yes)
The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step S512). When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step S512; No), the first change of the image display device 5 is performed. In the 1 hold display portion 5HL, the hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number “1” is erased and displayed as an active display on the variable display corresponding display portion AHA, and each display corresponding to “2” to “4” is displayed. The display position of one hold display is moved (shifted) to the right one by one (step S513).
.

After executing the processing of step S513, the CPU 120 for effect control erases the stored content of the hold display number “0” (active display) in the first start winning command buffer and holds the hold display numbers “1” to “4”. ”Is shifted one by one (step S514).
. After executing the process of step S514, the hold display setting process is terminated.

In the process of step S512, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step S512; Yes), the effect control CPU 120
In the second hold display portion 5HR of the image display device 5, the hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number “1” is erased and displayed as an active display on the variable display corresponding display portion AHA.
The display positions of the second hold displays corresponding to “4” to “4” are moved (shifted) leftward one by one (step S518).

After executing the process of step S518, the CPU 120 for effect control erases the stored contents of the hold display number “0” (active display) in the second start winning command buffer and holds the hold display numbers “1” to “4”. ”Is shifted one by one (step S519).
. After executing the process of step S519, the hold display setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the effect control process shown in FIG. 17, step S161.
After executing the hold display setting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 (initially “0”).
In accordance with (1), one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to do so. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. Is done.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Various control data is read from the effect control pattern determined in step S171 in correspondence with the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Various production controls are performed.

The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process includes a process of determining whether the variable display result notified by the display result designation command is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. When the variable display result is “big hit” or “small win”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while when the variable display result is “lost”, the production The process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

The special figure waiting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. And
When the hit start specifying command is received, the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, and the jackpot type specified by the display result specifying command received before that is “probable change” or “ If it is “non-probable change”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “6”. If the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, or the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the display result specifying command received before that If the big hit type identified by is “surprise”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

The special winning opening short-term opening process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this special winning opening short-term opening process, the production control CPU 1
20 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the “big hit” big hit game state or the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls in the “surprise” big hit game state or the small hit game state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED (eg, the effect control for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit or a small hit has occurred) ). In addition, the process at the time of short-opening of the big prize opening is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag corresponding to the reception of the big hit end specifying command or the small hit end specifying command from the main board 11 To "7".

The special winning opening normal opening process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this special winning opening normal opening process, CPU 1 for effect control
20 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change”, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents in the display area of the image display device 5; The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change” such as turning on / off / flashing the LED (including effect control for notifying the image display device 5 that the jackpot has occurred, for example). ). Further, in the special winning opening normal opening process, the value of the effect control process flag is set to “7”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11, for example. Update.

The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the voice control board 13 is set. Voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the player, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on / off by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state such as blinking. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

Next, details of the effect in this embodiment will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, the effect effect A and the effect effect B can be executed. The action effect A is an effect in which the image of the bomb acts on the corresponding display. The action effect A includes an action effect A gas that does not change the hold display.

On the other hand, in the action effect B, after the arrow image corresponding to the action effect B is once displayed on the image display device 5, the arrow image is changed to the corresponding display until the corresponding display of the notice target is deleted. It is an effect that acts. That is, when the image of the arrow is displayed on the image display device 5, the execution of the action effect B is stocked. Thus, the effect (displaying an arrow image) that stocks (implies) the execution of the effect effect B is also referred to as a notification effect that informs that the effect effect B will be executed in the future. Further, a plurality of action effects B can be stocked. In other words, a plurality of arrow images may be displayed. When the action effect B is executed, the on-hold display always changes, so that the player can change the minimum number of times the corresponding display changes depending on the number of arrow images being stocked (displayed). It is possible to grasp the stage of change (display mode). For example, when the current display color of the corresponding display is “blue” and two arrow images are stocked, it can be recognized that at least the action effect B is executed, and the change is at least two steps. Can be understood to be "red". By executing such action effects B and notification effects, the player comes to pay attention to these effects, and the interest is improved.

Thus, in this embodiment, in one corresponding display (one hold notice effect), since a plurality of notification effects can be executed (action effects B are a plurality of stocks), depending on the number of notification effects, It becomes possible to recognize to what level the corresponding display changes, and the interest of the game is improved. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the display mode of the correspondence display may change in a plurality of stages. That is, there is a case where a plurality of stages are changed corresponding to one action effect and one notification effect. As a result, the player expects to change more stages in response to one action effect and one notification effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that the notification effects may be executed one by one, or the correspondence display may be changed step by step.

In addition, the effect mode (displayed image) of the effect effect A and the effect effect B is an example, the effect effect A is an effect effect with a gaze effect, and the effect effect B is an effect effect with a notification effect. Good. In addition, the production mode of the production (notification production) that stocks the action production B is an example, and any production that can indicate that the production production B is being stocked may be used.

In the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG.
The action effect setting process for determining whether or not to perform the action effect A gaze is executed. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect production setting process. In the action effect setting process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the corresponding display change pattern stored in the start winning command buffer (first start winning command buffer or second start winning command buffer). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the corresponding display changes in this variation (whether an action effect that is not a frustration is executed) (step S601).

If the corresponding display changes in the current variation (step S601; Yes), whether or not to perform the operational effect B in the current variation by referring to the operational effect pattern stored in the start winning command buffer. Is determined (step S602). When the action effect B is executed in the current variation (step S602; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stock number of the action effect B specified by the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is zero. (Step S603).

In spite of the fact that the action effect B is executed in the current variation, if the number of stocks of the effect effect B is 0 (step S603; Yes), the effect is inconsistent. Is determined to be stocked (the notification effect of stocking one arrow is executed) (step S604). In this case, the effect presentation B is stocked in the current variation, and the stocked action presentation B is executed.

If the corresponding display does not change in the current variation (step S601; No),
The presence / absence of execution of the action effect A gaze is determined (step S605). FIG. 24 shows step S605.
An example of the determination ratio is shown. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, whether or not the corresponding display changes in the future including the current change, which is the current display mode, and the current number of stocks of the action effect B Accordingly, it is determined whether or not the action effect A gas is executed at a different rate.

In particular, when there is a future change schedule, and the current display mode is the same, when the current stock number is large, it is easy to determine that the action effect A gaze is executed at a higher rate than when it is small. It has become. If there is a large number of stocks of action effects B, the action effects are further executed, and the expectation level is increased when the effect effects are executed, except when the number of stocks changes to the highest “rainbow”. Players expect to improve. Therefore, in this embodiment, the greater the current number of stocks of action effects B (the number of notification effects), the greater the effect effect A gasset (
Improving the execution frequency of the suggestion effect) can effectively raise the player's expectation,
The interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, regardless of the current number of stocks of action effects B (number of notification effects), the execution frequency of action effects A gaze (suggest effects) is improved as compared to the case where the notification effects are not being executed. You may make it make it. By doing in this way, the same effect can be produced.

When there is no plan to change the corresponding display in the future, the number of stocks is inevitably 0, but the execution ratio of the action effect A gaze is low. In particular, when the current display mode is “rainbow” at the highest level, the action effect A gaze is restricted from being executed. By doing this,
It is possible to prevent the performance of the gaze from being executed in a situation where the corresponding display does not change any more, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced due to the execution of the useless performance. In this embodiment, when the current display mode is “rainbow” at the highest level, the action effect A gaze is not always executed, but it is limited to be executed with a low probability. May be.

It should be noted that if the highest stage of the hold notice effect is not confirmed as a big hit, an effect such as the action effect A Gase may be executed. In this case, it is only necessary to show that the degree of expectation is higher when the hold notice effect is at the highest stage and when the effect of the frustration is executed.

Further, even when there is no plan to change the corresponding display in the future, the action effect A gaze is executed in the case of the “blue” to “red” stage than in the case where the current display mode is “white”. The ratio is high. By doing in this way, a player's sense of expectation can be raised effectively.

When there is a plan to change the corresponding display in the future, it is easier to determine that the action effect A gaze is executed as the stage of the current display mode is higher. Since the higher the level of the current display mode is, the more the player and the higher the level that the player wants to change, the higher the level of determination, the more effective the player's expectation can be.

In step S605, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to perform the action effect A gaze at the above-described determination ratio. The determination result may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (start winning prize command buffer or the like). The determination ratio shown in FIG. 24 is an example, and can be arbitrarily changed without departing from the gist of the present invention.

When the action effect B is not executed in the current fluctuation (step S602; No), when the action effect B is executed in the current fluctuation, and the stock number of the action effect B is not 0 (step S603; No), or After executing the process of step S605, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the number of stocks of the effect effect B (the number of notification effects, the number of arrows in the notification effect) (step S606).

FIG. 25 shows an example of the stock number determination ratio in step S606. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5, in step S <b> 606, the current stock number (informing effect number) is determined according to the remaining number of executions of the effect effect B. Note that the determination ratio of the number of stocks is an example, and the degree of advantage (such as big hit reliability) may be different depending on the number of stocks per time.

After the process of step S604 or S606 is executed, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (command buffer at the start winning prize etc.). Further, the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is updated (step S607). When the process of step S604 is executed, the value of the stock number counter is incremented by 1. When the process of step S606 is executed, the value of the stock number counter may be updated based on the determination result in step S606. . Thereafter, the effect production setting process ends.

It should be noted that the number of notification effects executed and whether or not the action effect A gaze is executed are determined for each change in this way, but when determining the corresponding display change pattern (when winning) For example, it may be determined in advance whether the number of executions of the notification effect, the execution timing, or the action effect A gaze is executed. Also, preparing a corresponding display change pattern in which the number of notification effects executed, execution timing, presence / absence of action effect A, and which action effect is to be executed are prepared in advance, and the corresponding display change pattern is determined. Thus, not only the manner of changing the corresponding display, but also a series of effect forms of action effect and notification effect may be determined.

In the variable display effect setting process in step S172 in FIG. 17, an effect effect execution process is executed for executing a change in the display manner of the notification effect, the effect effect, and the corresponding display (pending notice effect). FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect production execution process. In the action effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes stock of the action effect B (notification effect) in the current fluctuation, and whether or not it is the execution timing of the notification effect. Is determined (step S701). In this embodiment, the notification effect is executed at a timing immediately after the start of change (for example, 1 second after the start of change). Therefore, in step S701, it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is determined to execute the notification effect in steps S604 and S606 of FIG. 23 and whether or not it is 1 second after the start of variation.

The execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to this, and may be an arbitrary timing during the change or at the end of the change. For example, the notification performance execution timing is as follows: at the start of fluctuation, before each decorative symbol is stopped (during high-speed fluctuation), when each decorative symbol is stopped, when reaching reach, at the time of development to super reach (hold display or active display) A plurality of timings), a super-reach reach production, or the like. Further, it may be executed in response to an operation of the operating means such as the push button 31B. If the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, it is executed during each re-variation or during each re-variation of the pseudo-series. It is good also as timing.

When the stock of the effect effect B (notification effect) is executed and when it is the execution timing of the notification effect (step S701; Yes), the stock of the effect effect B (notification effect) is executed (step S702). Specifically, an arrow image is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the action effect B stock (notification effect) is not executed, when it is not the execution timing of the notification effect (step S701; No), or after executing the process of step S702,
It is determined whether or not the action effect is to be executed and whether it is the execution timing (step S703). The effect effect here includes an effect effect of gas. That is, it is determined here whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect A, the action effect B, or the action effect A gaze. In this embodiment, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the corresponding display shifts (after the fluctuation starts) is the display mode change timing. Accordingly, the action effect is executed at a specific timing before that (for example, 4 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In step S703, it may be determined whether it is the execution timing of the action effect by determining whether it is 4 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. When it is neither the execution timing nor the execution timing (step S703; No), the operation effect execution process is terminated.

When the action effect is executed and when it is the execution timing (step S703)
; Yes), the corresponding effect is executed (step S704).

And when the performed effect production is the effect production B (step S705; Yes).
Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S706). At this time, the action effect image used in the action effect B is deleted from the image display device 5 (an arrow image is reduced by one).

When the effect effect performed is other than the effect effect B (step S; No), step S706
After the above process, the corresponding display is changed or maintained according to the corresponding display change pattern (step S707). Thereby, the display mode of the corresponding display is changed or maintained as a result of the effect. Thereafter, the effect production execution process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, an example of an effect image when the hold notice effect and the effect effect are executed will be described.

FIG. 27A shows the image display device 5 in which variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. An active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The first hold display section 5HL displays first hold displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4”. The hold displays H1 to H3 are displayed in a “white” circle which is a normal mode, and the hold displays H4 are displayed in a “blue” circle which is a notice mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27B, the lost symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the next variable display is started, in step S606 of FIG.
When it is determined that one stock is to be stocked (informing effect is to be carried out to stock one arrow)
As shown in FIG. 27C, an arrow effect image SB <b> 1 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, it can be seen that the hold display H3 displayed in “blue” in the notice mode changes to at least “green”. The action effect image SB1 of the arrow continues to be displayed until the action effect B is executed. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand that the action effect image SB1 of the arrow is stocked, a display area for the action effect image may be provided or the action effect image may be surrounded by a frame.

If it is determined in step S605 of FIG. 23 that the action effect A gaze is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 27D, an action effect in which the bomb action effect image SA1 acts on the hold display H3 is executed. Is done. Since this effect is an effect of gas, the display mode of the hold display H3 does not change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27E, the lost symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, when it is determined that one action effect B is to be stocked (that is, a notification effect of stocking one arrow is to be executed), as shown in FIG. 27F, an arrow effect effect image SB2 is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the display device 5. At this point in time, two action effects B are stocked, and it can be seen that the hold display H2 displayed in “blue” in the notice mode changes to “red” at least two stages above.

In addition, in this display example, it is determined to the corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-21 shown in FIG. 21 that changes the display mode at the time of the active display and the action display B is executed twice. Suppose that it is decided to do.

As shown in FIG. 27G, during the variable display when the hold display of the notice mode becomes the hold display number 1, the action effect B in which the arrow action effect image SB1 acts on the hold display H1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 27H, the display mode changes to “green”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28A, the lost symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, when variable display of the notice target is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the action effect B in which the action effect image SB2 of the arrow acts on the active display AH is executed, and FIG. As shown, the display mode changes to “red”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28D, for example, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Modification)
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible.
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the one described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Further, at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, in the case of executing the hold notice effect in step S504 of FIG. 18, after determining the final display mode based on the table shown in FIG. 19, the corresponding display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. The overall display contents of the pending notice effect are determined by determining the corresponding display change pattern in which the display mode and the change timing of the corresponding display in each variable display are associated with each other. The method for determining the content of the holding notice effect is not limited to this, and any determination method may be used. For example, in step S504 in FIG. 18, only the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the final display mode are determined, and each effect effect is executed whether or not the effect effect is executed every time variable display is executed. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the corresponding display is changed as a result of the action effect. In this case, for the determined final display mode,
What is necessary is just to perform an effect production (change of a display mode) so that a book bottom may meet.

Also, in step S504 in FIG. 18, the display mode at the time of winning and the final display mode are determined, and in each variable display until the variable display of the notice target is executed, the display mode is changed or changes when changing The number of stages may be determined based on a level difference (stage difference) between the display mode at the time of winning and the final display mode. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the change pattern determination process executed in step S504 of FIG. 18 in such a case. In this modification, the hold notice effect is also referred to as a predetermined effect. In the change pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a display mode and a final display mode at the time of winning the corresponding display (step S801). In step S801, for example, according to the variable display result and variation pattern of variable display, for example, with reference to the winning and final display mode determination table shown in FIG. A display mode and a final display mode are determined. The table shown in FIG. 33 is a table when the variable display result is a big hit (16R).
In addition to this, a table for big hits (accuracy), super reach lose, other loses, etc. is also prepared. The numerical value in FIG. 33 indicates the determination ratio (%). For example, the determination ratio of “white” at the time of winning and the final display mode “rainbow” is 3%.

Subsequently, based on the level difference from the final display mode, the number of change steps in each hold display number is determined (step S802). For example, when the number of holds becomes 4 at the time of winning a prize, the number of change stages at the timing of 4 times when the hold display number 3, hold display number 2, hold display number 1, and active display are determined.

In step S802, the number of change steps at each timing is determined with reference to the change step number determination table shown in FIG. Here, the level difference is 1 for “white” and “blue”, 2 for “white” and “green”, 3 for “white” and “red”, and 4 for “white” and “rainbow”. For example, when the number of holds at the time of winning becomes 4, when the display mode at the time of winning is “white” and the final display mode is “rainbow”, first, the level difference 4 and the hold display number 3 in FIG. Refer to the decision rate, hold display number 3
Determine the number of steps to change. Subsequently, referring to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 3 and the determination ratio of the hold display number 2, the hold display number 2
Determine the number of steps to change. Similarly, referring to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 2 and the determination ratio of the hold display number 1, the hold display number 1
Is determined, and the display mode in the hold display number 1 and the final display mode (“
With reference to the level difference from the “rainbow”) and the determination ratio of the active display, the number of change steps when the active display is made is determined.

As described above, since the change stage at each timing is determined based on the level difference from the final display mode, it is not necessary to provide a corresponding display change pattern in advance or to provide a plurality of tables for determining it. Capacity can be reduced and processing load can be reduced.

As described above, after determining the winning display mode, the final display mode, and the number of change stages at each timing, the series of determination results is stored (step S803). Thereafter, the change pattern determination process ends.

In the process of step S172 in FIG. 17, a hold notice effect is executed based on the winning display mode, final display mode, and change stage at each timing determined in this way.

Note that the processing in step S802 in FIG. 32 may be executed at the start of each change. That is, the winning display mode and the final display mode may be determined in advance, and the number of change steps may be determined based on the current display mode and the final display mode at the start of each change.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a modified example provided with a sub display device 5 </ b> S in addition to the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modification shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a sub display device 5 </ b> S composed of an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like is provided below the image display device 5. The sub display device 5S may be provided so as to be operable.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the modification shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the first hold display portion 5HL, the second hold display portion 5HR, and the active display portion AHA are provided in the sub display device 5S.
Of these, at least a part of the image display device 5 may be provided. FIG.
In the pachinko gaming machine of the modification shown in FIG. 30, the arrow images 202, 2 are used as the hold notice effect.
An effect accompanied by an effect effect in which 03 acts on hold display or active display is executed.

In this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (5), an effect effect A executed using only the sub display device 5S and an image as shown in FIGS. 30 (3) to (5). An effect B that is executed in conjunction with the display device 5 and the sub display device 5S can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (5), in the on-hold notice effect with the effect effect A of the modified example, the arrow image 202 appears on the sub display device 5S, and the active display (the corresponding display may be sufficient) The display mode of the active display changes upon hitting.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (3) to 30 (5), in the on-hold notice effect with the effect effect B of the modified example, an arrow image 203 appears in the image display device 5, and the arrow image 203 becomes the sub display device 5S.
The display mode of the active display is changed by hitting the active display (which may be a corresponding display).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example, the holding notice effect (action effect) using a plurality of display devices can be executed, and the holding notice effect (action effect) becomes various.

Then, which of the effect display A executed by using the sub display device 5S and the effect effect B executed by the mode in which the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S are linked to each other has changed the corresponding display. Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation (the player's advantage) may be different. For example, it is only necessary to determine which action effect is to be executed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 31, the expectation (reliability) and super reach reliability for the big hit are higher when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed. Yes. By doing in this way, the reservation notice effect and the action effect become diverse, and the effect of these effects is improved.

The sub display device 5S serving as the first effect device, the image display device 5 serving as the second effect device, and the LCD, respectively, may be an effect device other than the LCD. For example,
Various effect devices such as a dot display device, a segment display device, an LED, an accessory, a light guide plate, and a movable member may be arbitrarily combined. Further, three or more effect devices may be provided. Moreover, although it is physically one display device, a part of the display device may be shielded so that it looks like two display devices.

In this modification, the display mode of the corresponding display is always changed when the action effect is executed. However, the display notice of the corresponding display is not changed even when the action effect is executed. An effect may be executed. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, the effect may be stocked. That is, the effect of the modification may be incorporated in the above embodiment. For example, the action effect A of the above embodiment may be an effect executed using the sub display device 5S, and the effect effect B may be an effect executed in a mode in which the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S are linked. Good. Also in this case, the effect A performed using the sub display device 5S,
Action effect B executed by the mode in which the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S are linked,
The degree of expectation (the player's advantage) may be made different depending on which of the changes the corresponding display changes. Moreover, you may provide the effect presentation C performed by the aspect which made the image display apparatus 5, the sub display apparatus 5S, and other presentation apparatuses (for example, the lamp | ramp of a game frame, etc.) interlock | cooperate.

Further, in this modification, when the action effect B is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability for the big hit and the super reach reliability) is higher or more advantageous than when the action effect A is executed. Although the case where a degree becomes high is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. This expectation may be a probable big hit expectation, a pseudo-continuous expectation, or the like. In addition, for example, when the action effect B is executed, the proportion of the so-called “gase hold notice effect” may be smaller than when the action effect A is executed, and the gaming state may be changed. When not informing, the ratio that the internal gaming state is advantageous to the player may be increased. On the contrary, you may comprise so that an advantage degree may become low in the direction where the effect presentation B is performed compared with the case where the effect presentation A is performed.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, even when the action effect (action effect A, action effect B, action effect A gaze) is executed, the effect effect B stock (notification effect) is executed. However, the notification effect may not be executed in the variable display in which the effect effect is executed. That is, the notification effect may be executed on the condition that the action effect is not executed in the current variation. The action effect B is always executed after the stock of the effect effect B (notification effect) is executed, but the action effect B may be executed without passing through the notification effect. May be. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect production setting process (step S171 in FIG. 17) in the modified example.
In addition, about the process similar to the said embodiment, the same step number is assigned and description is abbreviate | omitted.

In the action effect setting process in this modification, when the action effect B is executed in the current variation (step S602; Yes), the stock of the action effect B specified by the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. Determine whether the number is 1 or more (
Step S621). When the number of stocks of the action effect B is 1 or more (step S621)
Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the stock number counter (step S622), and the action effect setting process is completed. When the number of stocks of action effect B is 0 (step S621; No),
The action effect setting process is finished as it is. As described above, when the action effect B is executed with the current fluctuation, and the number of stocks of the action effect B is 0, the effect effect B is not performed without the notification effect.
Will be executed directly. If the number of stocks of action effect B is 1 or more, the value of the stock number counter is decremented by 1 in advance in this process, so the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the stock number counter when action effect B is executed (FIG. 26). Step S706) is omitted. Note that FIG.
In the action effect execution process shown in FIG. 6, when the stock number is determined to be 1 or more, the value of the stock number counter may be subtracted by 1 at that time.

In this modification, the correspondence display does not change due to the current variation (step S6).
01; No), that is, when neither the effect effect A nor the effect effect B is executed, it is determined whether or not the effect effect A gaze is executed (step S623). Then, an effect effect (effect effect A, effect effect B,
Only when the action effect A gaze) is not executed (step S623; No), the stock number of the effect effect B is determined (step S606). After the processing of S606 is executed, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (start prize winning command buffer or the like), and RA is determined according to the determination result.
The value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of M122 is updated (step S624).
). When the action effect A gaze is executed (step S623; Yes), step S624
After executing the process, the effect production setting process is terminated.

According to such a modification, the notification effect is executed in the fluctuation when the action effect is not executed, so that the possibility that some effect is executed during the execution of the hold notice effect increases, and the interest of the hold notice effect is enhanced. Can be improved.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the final display mode determination table shown in FIG.
For each variable display result such as “big hit (probability / non-probability)”, “big hit (surprise)”, and “losing (super reach)”, the determination ratio assigned to the display stage of the hold display was varied. However, the determination ratio assigned to each display color is arbitrary according to the type of variable display and the variable display result.
For example, when “big hit” in which a 16-round game is executed and “big hit” in which a 4-round game is executed are set as variable display results, a final display mode of a pending display of “big hit” in which a 4-round game is executed For example, the determination ratio such as “green” may be set higher than the “big hit” in which the 16-round game is executed. In addition, when the “big hit” is set for the variable display result when the upper limit number of variable displays is 100 times and 50 times, respectively, the last of the “big hit” hold display when the upper limit number of variable displays is 50 times As the display stage, the determination ratio of “green” or the like may be set higher than “big hit” in the short time state where the upper limit number of variable displays is 100 times.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the process of step 502 shown in FIG. 18, when the first start winning port designation command is received in the low base state, or the second start winning port designation command is received in the high base state. In such a case, the pre-reading notice by the hold notice effect is executed. However, regardless of the received start winning opening designation command, the pre-reading notice by the hold notice effect may be executed only when the gaming state is either the low base state or the high base state.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the special figure game using the first special figure, as shown in the first special figure display result determination table of FIG. 10 (A), “big hit”, “small hit”, “ In the special figure game using the second special figure as the special figure display result of “losing”, as shown in the second special figure display result determination table of FIG. As a display result, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to each special figure display result. However, the special figure display result of the special figure game using the first special figure is only “big hit” and “losing”, and “
“Small hit” may not be included. In addition, the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special figure may include “small hit”.

In the above embodiment, for example, data may be exchanged with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server via a portable terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function and an internet network connection function. The player connects to the management server using a portable terminal or the like, receives the player's own ID in advance, receives a notification regarding his / her own performance during the game, or past game history It is possible to play a game in a game mode reflecting the above.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of segments not limited to numbers and symbols, etc. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display results displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and the special symbols variably displayed are “0” to “
It is not limited to what consists of the number which shows "9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. For example, a lighting pattern during variable display of a special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol) Are also included in the special symbol variable display (in this case, the one pattern (eg, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the special symbol displayed as the variable display result. As a special symbol variable display, for example, “−” blinks, and as a variable display result, other special symbols (“7” for “big hit”, “1” for “lost”, for example.
")" Is also included in the variable symbol display. In addition, the variable display of the decorative design includes a blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative design. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol). It is also included in the variable display of normal symbols to repeat alternately. Also, the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed as a variable display result.

In the above-described embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio, etc., the same applies to the probability) may include 0%. In other words, the ratio and probability may be between 0 and 100%.
For example, to make one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is 30%,
In addition to setting the ratio of the other to 70%, the ratio of one is set to, for example, 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. Further, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio may not be 100% (there may be a part that is not included in either one or the other and may have a predetermined ratio). In addition, when the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above description, the variable display pattern selected on the one hand is selected on the other side to make the variable display pattern determination ratio in the specific period after the advantageous state different from the variable display pattern determination ratio in the non-specific period. This includes cases where the variable display pattern selected on one side and the variable display pattern selected on the other side partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

In the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading determination is performed on the sub-side. You may do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a variable symbol display result of a special symbol,
When a jackpot symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed, probability variation control is performed in which the jackpot type is “probability variation”. For example, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific area in an attacker provided in the game area A probability variation determination device type pachinko gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed may be used.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous, etc., one change pattern command is given when the change is started. Although the example of transmitting is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. 2
When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, when applied to slot machines,
It may be configured to count the total number of winning combinations such as a small role or replaying role (replay), calculate a winning rate based on the total number of generated winning combinations, and execute a specific effect. Good.

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. The specific configuration is as follows:
In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition, as a gaming machine of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means (for example, steps S604, S606, S) for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level.
An effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of 702;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, movable members 9051 to 905
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating the motor 4, and
Specific signals for driving electrical components in response to control signals from the control means in the serial communication system (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11)
Output means (for example, light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 9041)
2, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals are the same. Transmitted sequentially between the light emitter drivers on the light emitter control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H (high).
Set to a low slew rate output state),
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, step S6).
In the process of 05, there is a gaming machine characterized in that the presence or absence of execution of the action effect A gaze is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

The above gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means (for example, steps S604, S606, S) for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level.
An effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of 702;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, movable members 9051 to 905
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating the motor 4, and
Specific signals for driving electrical components in response to control signals from the control means in the serial communication system (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11)
Output means (for example, light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 9041)
2, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided and a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, in FIG. 46 (2)). As shown, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 9041 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals.
3c sequentially transmitted)
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F.
13c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state)
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, step S6).
(In the process of 05, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect A gaze is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 24)
There is also a gaming machine characterized by this.

According to such a gaming machine, a sense of expectation can be suitably improved by suggestion production, and interest is improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. In addition, if an unintended performance occurs due to noise during a game, the player may feel uncomfortable or distrustful, but the above gaming machine has a high level of control signal noise resistance, so the level of unintended performance is high. Can be suppressed. This leads to the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, the correspondence display is one of the places where the player pays particular attention during the game, and it is possible to highly suppress the occurrence of unintended display in such a correspondence display. The effect that it can improve can be acquired more.

Furthermore, the following gaming machines (a) and (b) can be cited as examples of gaming machines that can increase the noise tolerance of control signals for preventing malfunctions.
(A) Electric components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable member 9051)
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating ˜9054;
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , Luminous body driver 90411, motor driver 90
412 and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H (high).
And a low slew rate output state).
(B) Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable member 9051)
Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling operation motors 9060A to 9060C) for operating ˜9054;
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , Luminous body driver 90411, motor driver 90
412 and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals.
Are transmitted sequentially),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F.
In 13c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state).
Hereinafter, examples of these gaming machines will be described as other examples.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, other exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 36 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In FIG. 36, an effect movable mechanism 9050 described later is indicated by a broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, the lower right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is “second special symbol”.
Also called.

Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, a main image display device 905MA is provided. The main image display device 905MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. Main image display device 905
On the MA screen, for example, 3 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. In a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as two, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, “left”, “middle”,
In the “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, decorative symbols corresponding to each of them are variably displayed. In this case, in the special figure game, the first special symbol display device 904A.
Corresponding to the start of one of the variation of the first special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 904B and the variation of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, Decorative design display area 9
At 05L, 905C, and 905R, the decoration pattern change (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C,
At 905R, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

Thus, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the first special symbol display device 90 is displayed.
In synchronization with the special game using the first special graphic in 4A or the special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 904B, it is possible to change a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other. Display is performed and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as “temporary stop display”, and although the display result in the variable display has not been displayed deterministically, the player has confirmed that the variation of the decorative pattern due to scroll display or update display has not progressed. It becomes possible to recognize. The temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, etc., and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed for a period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals) Or a combination of English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, numbers, letters or symbols and character images, and character images are, for example, people, animals, other objects, or It may be configured to include a symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image showing an arbitrary figure. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, for each alphanumeric character indicating “1” to “8”, “1”
Symbol numbers from "8" to "8" are attached. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

After the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 90 are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed.
In 5R, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number flows from top to bottom sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, Subsequently, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed.
Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed.

Note that the decorative symbols are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and the image display device 905 (main image display device 9) corresponds to the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game.
05MA, a sub image display device 905SU described later, or the like) may be displayed on the screen. For example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, an effect that displays the result of the story corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol may be executed by displaying the effect image having the story. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, a battle effect in which a wrestling or soccer game or an enemy ally character fights may be performed. When the variable display result is “losing”, an effect of defeating the game or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, an effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the display color change display and the stop display in a specific display region are repeated. And when the variable display result is “losing”, by maintaining the state where the predetermined display color (for example, white) is stopped and displayed, or by maintaining the predetermined display color in a non-display state, Derived and displayed decorative symbols. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a “big hit”, a display color different from the predetermined display color (
For example, a decorative symbol is derived and displayed by maintaining the state of being stopped and displayed in red. In this way, during the variable display of decorative symbols, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols may be maintained in a non-display state. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display) as the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined design may be repeated so that other effect images are not displayed. As a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect image indicating the predetermined symbol used for variable display is not stopped and displayed, and the effect image indicating a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By displaying, a decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Occurs based on starting prizes by entering. In other words, a start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

For example, when the first start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening,
When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the special symbol display device 904A is established, the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition If the first start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, the second special symbol display device 904B is generated by the occurrence of the second start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening.
When the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is started. If the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is put on hold. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number.
A part of them (for example, a concept including the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excluding the total reserved memory number) may be indicated.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Second hold indicator 9025B
Displays the second special figure hold storage number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

On the right side of the main image display device 905MA, a sub image display device 905SU that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 905MA. The installation location of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 902. For example, the main image display device 905MA is installed near the center of the game area, The sub image display device 905SU may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as outside the gaming area, the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 903, the lower front portion, or the front side.

Below the main image display device 905MA, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not pass (enter) through the second starting winning port when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open.

A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first
The start condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 39, and is changed into a specific region that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the special winning opening door solenoid 9028 is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the grand prize winning opening, and the game ball passes through the big winning prize entrance (entrance). )
It becomes easy to do. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the big prize opening is, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG.
Detected by. Based on the game balls detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, the special variable winning ball device 907
If the special winning opening becomes open, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary design (
"Normal map" or "Normal map") is displayed in a variable manner (variable display) Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol holding display 9025C for displaying a general symbol holding memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 may be provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a number of obstacle nails, and a single or a plurality of general winning holes. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

The game board 902 is provided with an effect moving mechanism 9050 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect by lighting the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment. The production movable mechanism 9050
A plurality of (for example, four) movable members are provided. The effect movable mechanism 9050 changes between a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are positioned separately on the upper and lower screens of the main image display device 905MA and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are positioned in front of the screen of the main image display device 905MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right and front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The effect movable mechanism 9050 shown in FIG. 36 is for the retracted state. In this embodiment, a game area of the game board 902 is configured by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 9050 is arranged behind the transparent plate,
The game ball flows down in front of the effect movable mechanism 9050. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 9050 may be disposed in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

In FIG. 37, a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 9050 are the main image display device 9.
The case where it will be in the advance state located in front of 05MA is shown. FIG. 38 shows an operation example of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The effect movable mechanism 9050 includes an upper mechanism including two movable members 9051 and 9052 positioned on the upper screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state, and 2 positioned on the lower screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism having two movable members 9053 and 9054. That is, the effect movable mechanism 9050 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from or in close proximity to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state as the first state is established. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advancing state as the second state is obtained. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are provided with drive means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. The movable members 9051 and 9052 are configured such that their left ends are pivotally supported by a decoration member 9057 and are rotatable with respect to the decoration member 9057. The decorative member 9057 receives power from the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG.
Is moved up and down in accordance with the operation of the movable member 9051.

The movable member 9051 includes a front surface portion and a base body disposed behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 9052 receives power from the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 39 and rotates upward or downward with respect to the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B only needs to be attached to the front surface of the base body included in the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B provides a driving force for driving the movable member 9052 to be operable. The movable members 9053 and 9054 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism and the like, and are moved up and down by transmitting power from the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. 39 via a power transmission unit engaged with the link mechanism. However, it can be rotated around the left end.

A movable member position sensor 9061 shown in FIG. 39 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The movable member position sensor 9061 may be any sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057.
As an example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, or the like. From the operation state of the corresponding operation motors 9060A to 9060C, for example, the movable member 905 is used.
What is necessary is just to be able to detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, such as the positions of 1 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A. A position detection signal that can specify the operation positions of the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 is output. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation with respect to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, thereby moving the movable member 9051 A position detection signal capable of specifying the relative operation position 9052 and the like is output. The third position sensor is a motor 90 for operation.
The movable members 9053 and 9054 are detected by detecting the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of 60C or detecting the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C.
A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation position of the is output.

As another example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 9057, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. What is necessary is just to be comprised using. As a result, the first to fifth position sensors correspond to the corresponding movable members 9051.
˜9054 and the operating state of the decorative member 9057 and the like, and a position detection signal or the like corresponding to the detection result may be output. As described above, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members, respectively.

In each of the movable members 9051 and 9052, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9051 constitute a light emitter unit 9071 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9052 are:
90 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 39 are configured. As described above, the movable members 9051 and 9052 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

A plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 are:
Each includes a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 emit light from the light emitting unit 9071 such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color and displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. The display effect by the lighting mode of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9072 can be executed. Thus, the light emitter unit 90
73 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time to execute a display effect. Movable members 9051, 9
In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 included in 052, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. Further, the movable members 9051, 9052 have a movable member 9051, 952 on the front surface of the partition.
A front plate decorating 052 is provided.

Like the movable members 9051 and 9052, the movable members 9053 and 9054 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, the movable member 90
In each of 53 and 9054, for example, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right direction). The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9053 are the light emitter units 90 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG.
73 is configured. The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9054 constitute a light emitter unit 9074 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG.

A plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 are:
Each includes a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9053 and the movable member 9054 emit light from the light emitter unit 9073, such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color, as well as displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. It is possible to execute a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9074. Thus, the light emitter unit 90
73 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time to execute a display effect. Movable members 9053, 9
In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 included in 054, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. In addition, movable members 9053, 954 are provided on the front surface of the partition members 9053, 9054.
A front plate decorating 054 is provided.

Note that the plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using full-color LEDs, and for example, single-color or multi-color LEDs may be used, or light emitters other than LEDs may be used. The partition may be configured by a member that is three-dimensionally formed in a lattice shape, or may be configured, for example, by forming a lattice-shaped pattern on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. . The partition is not limited to one configured to partition a plurality of light emitters one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of light emitters by a predetermined number, or may be configured in a predetermined direction (for example, lateral direction). And the vertical direction). Furthermore, such a partition may not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 38A, in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated from each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. Don't be. At this time, each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is located above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9052 is located behind the movable member 9051, so that the player cannot see or difficult to see the movable member 9052. It becomes. In addition, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054, so that the player cannot visually recognize or difficult to see the movable member 9053. Become. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, the main image display device 905.
The MA display screen is visible.

As shown in FIG. 38B, in the advanced state where the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. . When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 90
52 moves downward from the back side of the movable member 9051 with rotation, and the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with rotation. In addition, the movable member 9051 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 9052, and the movable member 9054 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 9053. Thus, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes difficult or impossible to see.

When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, FIG.
), The arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054 do not coincide with each other. On the other hand, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. Match. In this way, the production movable mechanism 905
When the 0 upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are in the advanced state, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are aligned, so that the movable members 9051 to 90 are aligned.
A sense of unity can be given to the display effects in each of 54. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, a plurality of movable members 9051-90.
By executing the integrated display effect at 54, the interest of the effect can be improved. Moreover, since the visibility with respect to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the production.

Speakers 908 for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903
L and 908R are provided, and the top frame LED 909a and the left frame L
An ED909b and a right frame LED 909c are provided. Each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B,
A decorative LED may be arranged around a special variable winning ball apparatus 907 and a frame member arranged at the peripheral edge of the main image display apparatus 905MA. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

The member that forms the lower plate includes, for example, a stick controller 90 that can be held and tilted by a player at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate).
31A is attached. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

A controller sensor unit including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. Push button 9031B
May be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B. It should be noted that the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B can change the display effect on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU by the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. Operation in the movable mechanism 9050, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909
b, It may be used in an effect (for example, a notice effect or a reach effect) in which a lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the right frame LED 909c is performed. Stick controller 9
Instead of 031A and push button 9031B, or stick controller 90
In addition to 31A and push button 9031B, a sensor for detecting the operation of the player may be provided. For example, it may have a configuration for directly detecting the player's movement, such as a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, A configuration may be provided that indirectly (remotely) detects the player's operation, such as a CMOS sensor. An arbitrary action may be detected by analyzing a result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). That is, the movement of an arbitrary object is mechanical, electrical, or
Any configuration that can be detected electromagnetically may be provided.

Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, and an audio output board 9013 as shown in FIG. 39 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, a drive control board 9016B and light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. The main substrate 9011 is a first substrate.
The variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure is controlled by performing lighting control and extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It also has a function of controlling variable display of predetermined display symbols. For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. Switch circuit 90110
Takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory and a solenoid 9028 for a special prize opening door.

As shown in FIG. 39, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. Wiring is connected.
In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub-side independent of the main board 9011. Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display are displayed. Device 905SU, light emitter unit 9071-
9074, speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable member 9051 connected to operation motors 9060A to 9060C.
Various circuits for controlling production operations by various electrical components for production, such as ˜9054, decorative member 9057, and other production devices, are mounted. That is, the production control board 9
Reference numeral 012 denotes an image display on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, an audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, lighting on a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and a light emitter unit 9071. Different from 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the lighting of the light emitting member constituting the decoration LED, the driving operation of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration member 9057, etc. The function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation is provided. FIG.
The production control board 9012 shown in FIG.
M90121, RAM90122, and effect data memory 90123A-90123C are mounted.

The effect control board 9012 includes a main image display device 905MA and a sub image display device 905.
Wiring for transmitting a video signal to the SU, wiring for transmitting an audio signal (effect sound signal) to the audio output board 9013, and the like are connected. In addition, wiring for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D is also connected via the effect control relay board 9016A. Drive control board 9016
The information signal transmitted to B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 by driving the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for turning on the light emitters 9071 to 9074.

The light emitter control board 9016D is mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is left frame LED 90 on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903.
What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting the some light-emitting body provided as 9b. The light emitter control board 9016E is mounted above the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is provided as a top frame LED 909a above the gaming machine frame 903. What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting a several light-emitting body. Also, the light emitter control board 9016F is a gaming machine frame 90.
3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F emits light for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as right frame LEDs 909c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating data.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is sent to the effect control microcomputer 9 mounted on the effect control board 9012.
From 0120, only the effect control relay board 9016A is relayed and transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 via the light emitter control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. The Furthermore, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90 mounted on the effect control board 9012.
From 120, in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A, the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E are relayed and transmitted.

Further, from the drive control board 9016B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating a result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061 is provided through the effect control relay board 9016A. Is transmitted to. Further, as an information signal indicating that a player's operation act on the push button 9031B has been detected, a wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012.

The audio output board 9013 is an audio output board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and the speaker 9 serving as a sound output device according to the audio signal from the effect control board 9012.
Various circuits for outputting sound from 08L and 908R are mounted.

The effect control relay board 9016A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and from the effect control board 9012 to the drive control board 9016B and the light emitter control board 901.
6C relays various signals transmitted toward the light emitter control board 9016D. The back pack is
The game board 902 is attached to the center part on the back side of the game board 902, and the main image display device 90 is in the center.
The opening which 5MA faces should just be formed. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the audio output board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 9012 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

The drive control board 9016B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The drive control board 9016B rotates the movable members 9051 to 9054 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A driver IC for performing control and movement control of the decorative member 9057 is mounted. An output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The drive control board 9016B has
The position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 9061 is used as an effect control relay board 901.
It only needs to include wiring for transmitting to the effect control board 9012 via 6A.
The light emitter control board 9016C is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits for driving the light emitter for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters are mounted.

The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 903 and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and the effect control board 9012.
Various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c are mounted based on commands and control data from Yes.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is transmitted to the relay board 9.
Relayed by 015. A control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and a sound used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Control command, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, L for decoration
ED, a light emitter control command used to control lighting operations of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a movable mechanism control command used to control the operation of the effect movable mechanism 9050, and the like It is included.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, 1
A chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs and fixed data, and an RA for providing a game control work area
M (Random Access Memory) 90102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 And I / O (Input / Output p
ort) 90105. Note that the random number circuit 90104 is not limited to that incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 is R
By executing the program read from the OM 101, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various types of variable data in the RAM 90102, and temporarily stores them.
CPU 90103 reads out the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102, CPU 90103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, CPU 901
A transmission operation in which 03 outputs various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 has a CPU 901.
03 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

FIG. 40 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. The effect control board 9012 includes, for example, an effect control microcomputer 90120 and a ROM 90.
121, RAM90122, production data memory 90123A-90123C, etc. are mounted. ROM 90121, RAM 90122, effect data memory 90123A
~ 90123C may be partly or wholly incorporated in the production control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of the production control microcomputer 901.
20 may be externally attached. The effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 40 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and the CPU 90.
130, a work memory 90131, a host interface 90132, a DRAM interface 90133, and a data memory interface 90134. Further, the production control microcomputer 90120 is a VDP (Video Display Processor).
) 90140, VRAM (Video RAM) 90141, and display output system interface 9
0142, an audio processing circuit 90143, an audio interface 90144, and a general-purpose output controller 90145. Note that VDP90140 is a GPU (Graphics P
rocessing Unit), GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally DS
It may be a microprocessor for image processing called P (Digital Signal Processor). VDP 90140, VRAM 90141, display output system interface 90142
, Audio processing circuit 90143, audio interface 90144, general-purpose output controller 90
145 may be partly or wholly incorporated in the production control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of it may be configured as an external circuit of the production control microcomputer 90120. .

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes control processing according to the effect control program. The ROM 90121 stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like that are read for the CPU 90130 to execute control processing. R
The AM 90122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 is the CPU 9
It is provided to execute various processes by 0130 and VDP90140. ROM901
In addition to the program for effect control, 21 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is composed of process data including The RAM 90122 stores various data used for controlling the rendering operation.

The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C store fixed data for executing effects. Among the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B have storage areas for storing in advance various image data (image element data) indicating display images in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. What is necessary is just to be provided. In the effect data memory 90123C, various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stored in advance, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A storage area or the like for storing in advance various light emission data indicating the lighting control content may be provided. Note that the light emission data indicating the lighting control content of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be generated using image data. The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be non-rewritable semiconductor memories, for example, may be rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memories such as NAND-ROMs, or are non-volatile such as magnetic memories and optical memories. Any recording medium may be used.

Top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, light emitter unit 90
Data for creating lighting data (light emission data) 71 to 9074 is the effect data memory 90123A, separately from the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. 90123B is stored in advance. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. It may be stored in advance in either of these. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 is the effect data memory 90123A to 90. 90123
C is stored in advance in any one of the C and the VDP 90 of the production control microcomputer 90120
When 140 performs a drawing process, the display data used for creation of lighting data may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU.

FIG. 41 shows a setting example of addresses and stored contents in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. FIG. 41A shows the ROM 90121.
The example of a setting of the memory content in is shown. The ROM 90121 is assigned consecutive addresses from the address MA00 as the leading address to the address MA10 as the final address. FIG. 41 (B1) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123A. The effect data memory 90123A has a ROM 90 as a head address.
The address MA10 + 1 that is the next continuous address is assigned to the last address 121, and the continuous addresses up to the address MA20 that is the final address are given. FIG. 41 (B2) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123B. The effect data memory 90123B has the effect data memory 90 as the head address.
The address MA20 + 1 that is the next consecutive address is given to the last address of 123A, and the continuous addresses up to the address MA30 that is the last address are given. FIG. 41 (B3) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123C. The effect data memory 90123C has the effect data memory 9 as the head address.
The address MA30 + 1 that is the next continuous address is assigned to the final address of 0123B, and the continuous addresses up to the address MA40 that is the final address are given. In this way, consecutive addresses are assigned to the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 90121 is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A.

In ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, programs and data used for execution of effects by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting a program module). RO
M90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and reserves other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the entire ROM 90121 has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area is 1.5.
It may have a gigabit or 2 gigabit storage capacity. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. CPU 9 of production control microcomputer 90120
Table data of various tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings by the 0130, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 90 as management data.
121 may be stored. The ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A store audio data used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memories 90123A and 90123B include a main image display device 90.
The image data used to control the display of the effect image in the 5MA and the sub image display device 905SU is stored, and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LE are stored.
Image data used for lighting control in a light emitter such as D909c, and a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be stored.

The ROM 90121 is provided with a storage area for storing sound data, and at least the sound data is stored. Therefore, the ROM 90121 has at least the speaker 908.
A first area for storing voice data as first control data used for voice control for outputting voice from L and 908R is provided. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 90123A is a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A second area is provided for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in the.

In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 90121 but also in the effect data memory 90123A. The storage area for storing audio data in the ROM 90121 is from the address MA02 shown in FIG.
The address is assigned up to the address MA10 which is the final address in 121. The storage area for storing audio data in the effect data memory 90123A is shown in FIG. 41 (B1).
As shown in the figure, the address MA10 + which is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A
1 to address MA11. As described above, the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area stores the audio data in the continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. An area is allocated. In the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area, audio data as first control data is stored in a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is stored not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area, but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. It is also stored in a storage area to which consecutive addresses from address MA10 + 1 to address MA11, which are the next addresses of address MA10, are assigned.

The effect data memory 90123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. On the other hand, since it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the ROM 901
21 or the like, the amount of control information to be stored in order to control the effects produced by various effect devices may increase, and the storage capacity may be insufficient. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 increases. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reduced by providing a storage area for data used for control different from the image data in the effect data memory 90123A. When providing an audio data storage area, a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the last address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 90121 is allocated to the effect data memory 90123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 90121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 90123A, it is read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. With that
Audio data can be read appropriately.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG.
In accordance with the effect control program read from M90121, processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the host interface 90132, or the CPU 90130 performs RAM90 via the DRAM interface 90133.
122, a variation data writing operation for writing various variation data in 122 and temporarily storing them.
130 is a variable data read operation for reading various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and various signals are output from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 such as the main board 9011 by the CPU 90130 via the host interface 90132 or the like. Receiving operation, the CPU 90130 performs the effect control microcomputer 9 via the host interface 90132 and other various circuits.
A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of 0120 is also performed. CPU9013
0 is the effect data memory 90123A through the data memory interface 90134.
90123C can be accessed, and stored data can be read out.

The VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed rendering function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example. CPU901
30 is an image processor that executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from 30. VDP
90140 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134, and read image data.

The VRAM 90141 provides a work area for temporarily storing the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, or a virtual display in which display data of effect images created by the drawing processing by the VDP 90140 is expanded and stored. Or provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 90141 is allocated with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, and a CG buffer, for example. Good.
The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the rendering process by the VDP 90140 is executed, or temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the rendering process. It is used to The display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 90141 is, for example, vector data such as points, lines, polygons (
Any pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 90140 based on (vector data) may be used. The VRAM 90141 includes, for example, the main image display device 9.
A real display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of 05MA and a virtual display area for storing display data of various images not displayed on the screen of main image display device 905MA are included. Also good. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 90141, and the display data of the virtual display area read out by the VDP 90140 is displayed and output. You may output from the system | strain interface 90142 to the main image display apparatus 905MA side.

An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 90141. The image display area includes a main image display device 905MA and a sub image display device 905.
Display data for displaying the effect image on the SU screen is stored. In the image drawing area, display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank is generated. The V blank is generated at a cycle in which an image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130.

By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period). In the next V blank period (second drawing display period), the storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 90142 to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in the second drawing display period. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is assigned in the second drawing display period, display data created by the drawing process is stored.

In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer may be allocated to each storage area to which an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU.

The CPU 90130 of the production control microcomputer 90120 is a VDP90140.
Access system registers and attribute registers built into the. Various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register in accordance with process data such as display control data included in the effect control pattern. In this way, in the effect control microcomputer 90120, the main image display device 90 is executed by the CPU 90130.
Display operations in the 5MA and the sub-image display device 905SU are indirectly controlled.

The process data includes a production control microcomputer 9 each time a V blank is generated.
The setting contents that the CPU 90130 of 0120 performs for the system register and attribute register of the VDP 90140 are shown. The setting contents of the system register include drawing and data transfer commands, CG data to be transferred, palette data, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register only need to indicate an attribute as a parameter used for rendering processing of the effect image. In the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated each time a V blank is generated.

The display output system interface 90142 outputs a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the main image display device 905MA. To output various images on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The display output system interface 90142 displays a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) as a sub-image display. Various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU by outputting it to the device 905SU.

The audio processing circuit 90143 is a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. Audio processing circuit 9
0143 accesses the ROM 90121 via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the host interface 90132, and accesses the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the data memory interface 90134. By doing so, audio data can be read out. The audio processing circuit 90143 may directly access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, the audio processing circuit 90143 is read from the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by the access by the CPU 90130. By receiving the supply of audio data,
It may be accessed indirectly. The audio processing circuit 90143 generates an audio signal (sound effect signal) using the audio data. The sound signal (sound effect signal) generated by the sound processing circuit 90143 is sent to the sound output board 9013 via the sound interface 90144.
Is output toward.

The general-purpose output controller 90145 includes, for example, a top frame LED 909a and a left frame LED 909b.
, Right frame LED 909c, and a control circuit for performing operation control in various effect devices such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting light emitter units 9071 to 9074 and drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The general-purpose output controller 90145 includes an internal bus of the production control microcomputer 90120 and a data memory interface 9013.
By accessing the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via 4, motor data and light emission data can be read out. The general-purpose output controller 9
0145 may directly access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and receives supply of motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130, for example. Thus, it may be accessed indirectly. General-purpose output controller 9014
5 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C or the display data supplied from the VDP 90140 as serial signal data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

FIG. 42 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Various circuits for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C. A light emitter control board 9016C shown in FIG. 42 includes a buffer memory 90151, a lighting data generation circuit 90152, and a serial output circuit 90153.
And a light emitter driver 90154 are mounted.

The buffer memory 90151 is provided on the effect control board 9 via the effect control relay board 9016A.
The data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of 012 is temporarily stored. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 may be data corresponding to the display data generated by the VDP 90140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes a buffer memory 901.
The storage data of 51 is read, and a predetermined conversion process is executed to generate lighting data constituting the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data serving as drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the luminance (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include gradation data serving as tone control information.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides a region where a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitters for each of the blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are set in advance as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 90153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

FIG. 43 shows a setting example in which a region where a plurality of light emitters in the movable member 9051 are arranged and arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. A region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged on the movable member 9051 includes light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 43A and FIG.
) To the light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. Similarly to the movable member 9051, the movable members 9052 to 9054 other than the movable member 9051 are set so as to divide the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. Thus, the movable member 905
The entirety of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 provided in each of 1 to 9054 is divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Note that the number of divisions of the light emitter block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050, the size of the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged, and the like. .

Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, depending on the shape of the movable members 9051 to 9054, etc., in the areas where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074,
There may be a surplus area where light emitters that do not fit in the rectangular light emitter block and are less than one light emitter block are arranged. In addition, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, there may be an empty area where the light emitter is not disposed in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including a surplus area where light emitters less than one light emitter block are arranged in an empty area in any one of the light emitter blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of light emitters is reduced.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 in a serial signal method.
Output to. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. Serial output circuit 901
53 is a serial output system for outputting a control signal, for example, 21 systems,
It has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring). Serial output circuit 901
The serial signal wiring corresponding to each of the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21 is connected to 53, and a control signal including lighting control information is output to each wiring by a serial signal system. As described above, the serial output circuit 90153 outputs the control signal including the lighting control information to the serial signal wirings of a plurality of systems by the serial signal method.

FIG. 44 shows a connection setting example between the serial output system and the light emitter block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 44, each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 has the light emitter blocks B01 to B01.
It connects so that two light-emitting body blocks may be allocated among B42. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via a serial signal wiring. The serial output system K02 is connected to a light emitter block B03 and a light emitter driver for controlling the light emitter block B04 through serial signal wiring. Also in the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that perform lighting control of light emitters included in a light emitter block assigned to one serial output system may be connected by a serial bus system via serial signal wiring. In addition, it is not limited to what is connected by a serial bus system, A some light emitter driver may be connected in series (connected by a daisy chain system).

The light emitter driving unit 90154 shown in FIG. 42 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitter drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitters included in regions divided into the light emitter blocks B01 to B42. . Each driver IC performs lighting control of a plurality of light emitters based on lighting control information indicated by a control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 90153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of a parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers is a strobe-side driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of the light emitter in accordance with drive control data indicated by the drive control signal,
The driver IC is classified into any one of the digit-side driver ICs serving as a gradation control circuit that performs gradation control of the light emitter according to the gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Light emitter block B01 ~
In each of B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block using a strobe side driver IC and a digit side driver IC. In addition,
As shown in FIG. 42, in the light emitter control board 9016C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is the same light emitter control board 90.
By sequentially transmitting between the illuminant drivers on 16C, it is configured to be transmitted to each illuminant driver.

FIG. 45 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11 as a specific example. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 45, the light emitter block B1.
As a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to 1, strobe side light emitter drivers 90411S
A digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU and a digit lower light driver 9
0411DD. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 44 includes the strobe side light emitter driver 90411S, the digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD corresponding to the light emitter block B11 from the serial output circuit 90153. And then connected to the light emitter driver provided corresponding to the light emitter block B12.

Light emitter driver 90411S, light emitter driver 90411DU, light emitter driver 904
Different address information is assigned to each of 11DDs. The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal indicating the lighting control information to which the address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11 Transmit the lighting control information.

The serial signal wiring includes a serial clock wiring for transmitting the serial clock SC,
It is only necessary to include serial data wiring for transmitting serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and performs lighting control of the plurality of light emitters.

The light emitter block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD. It is comprised with the combination with half block B11D comprised from these. Thus, each light emitter block only needs to be configured by a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the light emitter block. Note that the plurality of light emitter blocks is not limited to a combination of two half blocks. For example, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, a light emitter block constituted by only one half block may be included in addition to a light emitter block constituted by combining two half blocks. In the case where the light emitter block B11 is configured by only one half block, the light emitter block 9011S includes a strobe side light emitter driver 90411S and a digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, while a digit lower light emitter driver 9041.
A configuration without 1DD may be used. Thus, each light emitter block may be configured to include one strobe side light emitter driver and one or two digit side light emitter drivers.

Half block B11U and half block B11D should just be comprised so that the number of light-emitting bodies may become the same number, respectively. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver 90411S is connected to 12 strobe signal lines and outputs a strobe signal as a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 columns. The digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD are each connected to eight digit signal lines, and gradation data for gradation control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight rows. The digit signal that becomes the signal is output. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the digit upper side and the half block B11D corresponding to the digit lower side are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters composed of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. Yes. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the light emitter blocks other than the light emitter block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters. Thus, the half blocks as modules constituting the light emitter block only need to be configured so that the same number of light emitters can be controlled to be turned on.

Note that the number of light emitters included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be an arbitrary number determined in advance based on the specification and design of the light emitter driver. For example, when eight strobe signal lines are configured to drive and control a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns, a total of 64 light emitters comprising eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are provided. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be contained in one half block. Further, the number of light emitters that can be controlled to be lighted by one half block and the number of light emitters actually included in one half block do not always have to coincide with each other. For example, while the number of light emitters that can be controlled to light in one half block is 96, the number of light emitters actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of the light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. There may be fewer than 96. In this way, it is only necessary to control the lighting of a predetermined number of light emitters or less for each half block as a module smaller than a plurality of blocks obtained by dividing a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for performing dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data serving as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitters, control data for time-sharing driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Also, PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) corresponding to multiple light emitters connected to each digit signal line
) To generate gradation data serving as gradation control information for designating luminance (gradation) for each emission color. Note that the digit-side light emitter driver is not limited to the one that performs gradation control of the light emitter in accordance with the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. What is necessary is just to perform gradation control of the light emitter according to the physical quantity (pulse quantity) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system to which the light emitter block to be controlled for lighting is connected in the serial signal system. A strobe-side light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The light emitter driver at the upper or lower digit provided for each light emitter block outputs a digit signal based on the grayscale data, so that multiple light emitters connected to the digit signal line can be grayscaled. Control. Thus, in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the plurality of light emitters arranged in an array emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period in which the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks For each of B01 to B42, the lighting mode can be changed by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). As described above, by configuring the dynamic lighting control for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, the light emitter driving unit 90154 can perform lighting control using a plurality of light emitter drivers in parallel. .

FIG. 46A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), a motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. The motor drive driver 90412 receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. The motor drive driver 90412 then operates the motors 9060A, 9060B, and 906 based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.
0C drive control is performed.

The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is also input to the drive control board 9016B and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 46 (2) shows a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c.
2 shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for performing the lighting control.
As shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter driver 90904D is provided on the light emitter control board 9016D.
b is mounted. The luminous body driver 90413b includes an effect control relay board 9016A.
The control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is inputted in the serial signal format. Then, the light emitter driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

Also, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter control board 9016E has a light emitter driver 9.
0413a is installed. The illuminant driver 90413a includes an effect control board 9012.
The control signal from the production control microcomputer 90120 is the production control relay board 9.
The signal is input in serial signal format via 016A and further via the light emitter control board 9016D. The light emitter driver 90413a performs lighting control of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter control board 9016F includes the light emitter driver 9.
0413c is installed. The illuminant driver 90413c includes an effect control board 9012.
The control signal from the production control microcomputer 90120 is the production control relay board 9.
016A, and further, a light emitter control board 9016D and a light emitter control board 9
It is input in serial signal format via 016E. Then, the light emitter driver 90
413c is a right frame LED 90 based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.
The lighting control of 9c is performed.

As shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are respectively sent to different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. Each light emitter driver 904 is transmitted sequentially between the mounted light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c.
It is comprised so that it may each transmit to 13a-90413c.

In this embodiment, the LEDs provided in the gaming machine frame 903 are comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively. A plurality of light emitters (as top frame LEDs 909a) above the frame 903
Color LED or single color LED), and left frame LED 909b on the left side of gaming machine frame 903
A plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided, and a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as right frame LEDs 909c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903.

Further, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver (for example, a light emitter driver 904 shown in FIG. 45) for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074.
11S, 90411DU, 90411DD. Hereinafter, it is also simply referred to as “light emitter driver 90411”. ), Motor drive driver 90412, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b
And light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 for controlling lighting of the right frame LED 909c.
13c is realized by using the same kind of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

Note that serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c convert an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and one that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals are different. 47 and 48, the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described as a representative example, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the luminous body driver 90411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the motor driving driver 90412 and the luminous body driver 90 are provided.
Reference numerals 413a to 90413c are realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the serial-parallel conversion circuit receives a clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 9016E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 16D receives a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. The light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E
The clock signal and data from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413b are respectively output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413a. It is configured to be output to. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
The light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E is a relay board 901 for effect control.
The control signal (clock signal and data) input via 6A and the light emitter control board 9016D is output to the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F. The clock signal and data are respectively sent from the CLK / O terminal and DATA / O terminal of the parallel conversion circuit to the light emitter driver 90.
It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes 413c.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and are converted into 24 channels from the serial signal format. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. In addition, each drive output terminal Q0-
Output signals from Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 for a 12-channel circuit) for inputting a decode address. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. DA
Address data is also included in the data input from the TA / I, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only the data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into a signal of a parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. Also, 1
In the 2-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since 6 terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversion circuits can be set. It is possible to connect.

The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 49 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. In contrast, FIG. 49 (2)
As shown in the figure, when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms are compared to the normal slew rate setting. Becomes moderate.

In general, it is better to keep the slew rate low in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate.
It is better to set the output of the low slew rate shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the rising and falling slopes of the waveform are larger, as shown in FIG.
It is better to set the normal slew rate output shown in 1).

The setting of the S terminal is simply a clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and DATA.
In addition to setting the waveform of the through output of data output from the / O terminal, it has a function of compensating the output waveform for the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the data input from the DATA / I terminal. . That is, in general, the production control microcomputer 90
The clock signal and data output from 120 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and DATA of the serial-parallel conversion circuit
When the transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching the / I terminal is large, a clock signal or data having a waveform that is broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment,
The serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but instead converts the clock signal or data input in the state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave into the original rectangular wave. It has a function to compensate for and output near waveforms. In this case, S
If the normal slew rate output is set according to the pin setting, the output signal is compensated for a waveform with a large rising and falling slope, so output an output signal that is closer to the original rectangular wave And the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, when the output setting is a low slew rate, a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform may be output.

The T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.
This is a setting terminal for setting the timeout reset function of the signal output from. When the T terminal is set to L (low), the timeout reset function is set to an invalid state, and the terminal is set to H (
When set to “High”, the timeout reset function is enabled.

When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the timeout reset function is enabled, CL
A clock signal and data are input from the K / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and a signal is timed out after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses after starting output of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Thus, the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the production control microcomputer 90120. It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second).

The Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to each drive output terminal Q0-Q.
23 is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of a signal output from the signal 23. Connect Q / S terminal to L
When set to (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. When the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), each drive output terminal Q
The output signal from 0 to Q23 is set to be a sync output.

Q / I terminals provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit are drive output terminals Q0 to Q.
23 is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of the signal output from 23 or not. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal.
A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is shown in FIG.
The common format shown in 1) and the basic format shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 50 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 47 and 48), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is
This is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format which will be described later. In the basic format, EX = 0.
Set to

As shown in FIG. 50 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including LED gradation control is performed. It can be carried out.

As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 50 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 50 (3).

As shown in FIG. 50 (3), the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, if the operation motor is driven and controlled using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like need not be performed unlike the case where lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED is performed.
It is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 50, the control data format used for the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the control data format used for the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, for example, the common control data format shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Also, for example, FIG.
The basic format shown in FIG. 6 is different in that it is short because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 50 (3) is different in that it is short because it includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured such that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal.
The internal clock signal of z is separated into 6 MHz clock signals of 1 MHz, and the drive output terminal Q0
... Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 4 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, and drive output terminals Q16 to Q16.
Group 5 is composed of four channels of Q19, and group 6 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. As shown in FIG. 51, the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1) have the same signal output timing, but the drive output terminals ( For example, group 1
The output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 and the group 2 drive output terminal Q4).

51, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described.
In the parallel conversion circuit, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is separated into three-phase clock signals of 1 MHz, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group, and the signal output timing is distributed. I am letting.

Next, the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51 is replaced with the light emitter driver 90411, the motor driver 909042, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 904.
A connection example when used as 13c will be described. 52 to 54 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Of these, FIG.
The connection example in the case of using a parallel conversion circuit as the light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is shown. FIG. 53 shows a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. FIG. 54 shows a serial-parallel conversion circuit with a top frame LED 909a and a left frame LED 90.
9b and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413a for controlling lighting of the right frame LED 909c
The connection example in the case of using as 0413c is shown.

First, referring to FIG. 52, a serial-parallel conversion circuit is converted to a light emitter unit 9071-90.
A connection example in the case of using as the light emitter driver 90411 for performing the lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting 74 will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver 9 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074.
0411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and AD2 to AD4 are ground (GND).
In this case, the decoding address is set to 0111 (B). FIG. 52 is an example, and since the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 include a plurality of light emitter drivers, different decode addresses are set for each light emitter driver.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
The light emitter drivers 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C, and the transmission of control signals between the light emitter drivers is the same light emission. Since it is performed on the body control board 9016C (transmission across the board is not performed), resistance to noise does not need to be so much concerned. there,
By setting the through output of the clock signal and data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

In the example shown in FIG. 52, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are ground (GND).
It is connected to the. That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, 10k is provided between the R terminal and the ground (GND).
Assume that an external resistor of Ω is connected. In this case, for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0
The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to the light emitter unit 90.
It is connected to a plurality of light emitters constituting 71-9074. In the example shown in FIG.
For convenience, a diagram is shown in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal.
When a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB have one color L
You may comprise so that it may be connected to ED, and if a monochromatic LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one monochromatic LED. Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown, but the drive output terminal Q depends on the number and arrangement of the light emitters.
If it is not necessary to use all the terminals 0 to Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Next, referring to FIG. 53, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is changed to an operation motor 9060A-90.
An example of connection when used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing 60C drive control will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, motors 9060A to 9060A for operation are used.
The motor drive driver 90412 for performing 60C drive control is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, among the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting the decode address, AD0 to AD0 are input.
AD2 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000111 (B).
FIG. 53 is an example, and other values may be set as the decode address.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are both connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5
V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, 10k is provided between the R terminal and the ground (GND).
Assume that an external resistor of Ω is connected. In this case, for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0
The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are the first operation motor 9060A.
It is connected to the. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 9060B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operation motor 9060C.

As described above, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, group 1
The output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are distributed by being grouped into three groups of ~ 3, but the output timings differ between the signals output to the same operation motor. Then, there is a possibility that the driving accuracy of the operation motor cannot be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the drive accuracy of the operation motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

On the other hand, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 described in FIG.
When connecting to a light emitter, such as when connecting to D909c, the above drive accuracy problem does not occur, so even if the output timing differs between signals output to each light emitter. There will be no hindrance. Therefore, the output signal from the drive output terminal is L
When connecting to a light emitter such as ED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is divided into a top frame LED 909a and a left frame LE.
Light emitter driver 90413 for controlling lighting of D909b and right frame LED 909c
A connection example when used as a to 90413c will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

In the example shown in FIG. 54, among the terminals AD0 to AD5 for decoding address input, AD0 to AD0 are input.
AD3 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), and AD4 and AD5 are ground (GND).
And the decode address is set to 001111 (B). FIG. 54 is an example, and there are three light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. Therefore, different decode addresses are set for the respective light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are different light emitter control boards 9016D. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on ˜9016F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

In the example shown in FIG. 54, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are ground (GND).
It is connected to the. That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, 10k is provided between the R terminal and the ground (GND).
Assume that an external resistor of Ω is connected. In this case, for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0
The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 54, a 12V power supply voltage (
VDL) and 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC) are used, so that the higher 12V power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release overvoltage of 12V or more. Yes.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 is connected to the top frame LED 909a.
And the left frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c are connected to a plurality of light emitters. In the example shown in FIG. 54, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, in the case where a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three RGB terminals may be connected to one color LED.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown.
If it is not necessary to use all the terminals 0 to Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, the light emitter driver 90411 is used.
In addition, the T terminals of the motor drive driver 90412 and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are respectively set to H (high), and the time-out function is set to the valid state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is a light emitter unit 9071 to 9074 in effect control process processing (see step S9065) described later.
A plurality of light emitters, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909
The control signal for controlling the lighting of c and the control signal for controlling the driving of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are output. However, since the timeout function is set to the valid state, the control is performed. If the signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the microcomputer 90 for effect control.
For example, 120 is a plurality of components constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in an effect control process (to be described later) (see step S9065). Luminous body and top LED 909a,
The lighting control of the left frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed.

In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter driver are provided every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals 90413a to 90413c is automatically stopped, for example, the operation motor 9060A
After performing the drive control of .about.9060C, the operation motor 9060 is caused by a signal loss or malfunction even though the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are controlled to stop.
The driving of A to 9060C does not stop, and it is possible to prevent the operation motors 9060A to 9060C from being seized.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high).
However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be used depending on the application. For example, for the motor drive driver, while setting the time-out function to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the operation motor, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Unlike the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, there is no problem such as burn-in with respect to the light emitters such as the frame LED 909c. Also good.

In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute lighting control and drive control, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the production control microcomputer 90120 (
(It may be provided on the effect control board 9012 or may be provided on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A). When the effect control microcomputer 90120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit Based on the control signal output once, at least for a predetermined period (
In this example, the control signal may be repeatedly output every 1 second).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (
5V), the case where the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware and the timeout reset function is set to the valid state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the set value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. You may comprise so that it can set.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the R terminal and the ground (GND)
) Is connected to an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example), and the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 mA in this example) is set, Error is also recommended (in this example, error ± 3
%).

In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided, such as the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in this embodiment, an effect is produced when light emission is sparse. Therefore, an error may be reduced by using an external reference resistor. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, and the left frame LED 909).
b, right frame LED 909c, operation means 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054), and serial communication from the control means (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120) Depending on the control signal by the method,
Specific signals for driving the electrical components (in this example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q
0 to output means (output signals from Q11) (in this example, the light emitter driver 90411).
, Motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 9016C. And control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H ( High) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the substrate and the wiring member (for example, the output means are provided)
Other output means is provided on another substrate connected via a flexible cable or a wire harness (in this example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413a).
90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F). In this case, the output means is
The first output state is set (in this example, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitter control board 901 is set.
In the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on 6D to 9016F, the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). for that reason,
In the case where another output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (
5V) or ground (GND), the S terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware and set to a low slew rate output state or set to L (low). Although the case where the output state is set to the normal slew rate is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the S terminal is connected to the S terminal setting register, and the setting value of the register is changed by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that a low slew rate output state is achieved in terms of software. You may comprise so that it can set whether it is set as the output state of a slew rate.

Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards In this example, a substrate (in this example, the light emitter control substrates 9016C to 9016F) that performs only one of the transmissions of the control signal according to the normal slew rate output state is provided. It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a control signal output by one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

55, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G is branched on the board, and one of the branches is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413e on the same light emitter control board 9016G, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 9016G. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 90413e and 90413f even on the same light emitter control board 9016G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the S terminal is set to L (low).
It is also possible to configure so as to increase the noise tolerance of the control signal by setting to the normal slew rate output state.

In Modification 2 shown in FIG. 55, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413g mounted on the light emitter control board 9016H is branched on the board, and one of the branched branches The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is an external light emitter control board (not shown).
The case of transmission to the upper light emitter driver (not shown) is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to the normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. Signal (in this example, each driver output terminal Q0-Q23, Q0-Q
11 in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 51, each group is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels per group). And the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 51, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, each drive output terminal Q0-Q23,
The output timing of signals from Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing the generation of radiation noise and further suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, the movable member that performs the operation (in this example, the movable member 9051-
9054). Further, driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operating motor 9
060A to 9060C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 53, the signals input to the same operation motor) Are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has passed since the input of the control signal (timeout function in this example). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high), see FIG. 48). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120 is, for example, production control process processing (see step S9065)). At least for a predetermined period (in this example, 1
By repeatedly outputting a control signal every second), the light emitter units 9071 to 907 are output.
4, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 90
The lighting control of 9c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 48). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

Next, control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a pachinko gaming machine 90
1 is a ball hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front of the housing in FIG.
For example, based on the rotation operation, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor provided in a predetermined hitting ball launching device. When the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the gaming ball is changed to FIG.
The first start condition is established based on the detection by the first start port switch 9022A shown in FIG. Thereafter, the first start condition is established based on, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. In this way, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

A game ball launched toward the game area is formed in the second variable winning ball apparatus 906B.
When the start winning opening is passed (entered), the game ball is moved to the second start opening switch 902 shown in FIG.
Detected by 2B. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, the second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the second start condition is satisfied based on, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In this way, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. When the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole.

In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, based on the fact that the normal symbol variable display result by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure", the opening control or expansion opening where the movable wing piece of the electric tulip is in the tilting position is performed. Control is performed, and closing control and normal opening control for returning to the vertical position when a predetermined time elapses are performed. Ordinary variable winning ball device 906 by opening control and expansion opening control
When B is in the expanded open state as the first variable state, the game ball can easily pass or pass through the second start winning opening. The normal figure starting condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is established based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal chart start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display 9020 uses a normal symbol display 9020 based on the fact that the general map start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. The figure game is started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is set to “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and an effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

After the special game is started based on these variable display results and the determination of the fluctuation pattern,
For example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, a definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, the main image display device 905
"Left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 90 arranged on the MA screen
In 5C and 905R, a variable display of a decorative design (effect design) different from the special design is performed.
The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively.

In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, a confirmed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 905MA derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. As a special symbol variable display result, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “big hit” (
When a predetermined losing symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost” (non-specific display result). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special game is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display area 905L
, 905C, and 905R, the same decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed on the predetermined active line, so that a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination may be derived and displayed.

In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous for the player. Then, in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated,
A round game (simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 9023, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) is detected for each detection.
Game balls are paid out as prize balls. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “16”) is reached. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls very easily, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a probable state based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition, and the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit probability) is higher than the normal state. Control may take place. The probability variation state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100
) Variable display is executed, or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, and the control is performed until a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied. . The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state becomes a short time state, and the short time control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until

In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 can control the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) is shorter than that in the normal state.
Control for improving the probability of “per normal” than in the normal state, and tilt control for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the variable display result “per normal”. By controlling the time to be longer than in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts to be greater than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. You can do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as “high opening control” (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the “special game state” (“advantage game” which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is reduced. Also referred to as “state”. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the main image display device 905MA, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state in which they match the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to fluctuation, enlargement / reduction, or deformation, or when multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol changes. An effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as “reach effect”. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern, etc., and the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (a big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In the reach production, it is only necessary to include a normal reach production and a super reach reach production with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is not a big hit combination, it is “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

As an effect of liquid crystal display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. In addition, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU
On the screen, for example, an effect using a character image and an effect of displaying a notification image based on the determination result of jackpot determination and variation pattern are also executed. Various effects executed during variable display in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed are also referred to as “variable display effects”. As an example of effects during variable display, there is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state will reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation, the possibility that a super reach reach effect will be executed, variable display A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a “hit”.

The presentation operations that are the notice presentation effects are “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display area 905L,
Decorative display of decorative symbols is started in all of 905C and 905R and before the variable display state of decorative symbols reaches the reach state (decoration in decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the symbol is temporarily displayed. Also,
The notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice effect patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach-miss combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived).

The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may have valuable values that can be used for replaying with the pachinko gaming machine 901, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. For example, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probable change state. Control, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), can be executed in a short time state The upper limit number of variable display becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is the second probability (
For example, the first probability (for example, 1/20) is higher than 1/50), and the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control in the big hit gaming state without being controlled in the normal state, is the second consecutive number of chunks ( For example, it may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the first consecutive number of channels (for example, “10”) larger than “5”).

ROM 90121 mounted on an effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS.
As part or all of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, for example, NAN
A D-ROM may be used, and the stored contents may be rewritten by a ROM writer which is a data writing device. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. In such a memory redundancy area,
Memory history information may be stored. The history information may be information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information is stored in a pachinko gaming machine 90 in which a memory has been used.
It may include at least one of model identification information such as 1 and date information. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each amusement store where the memory has been used. in this way,
By storing history information in the redundant area of the memory, there is no need to attach a barcode for recycling management outside the memory, and the recycling management is performed accurately based on the history information stored in the memory. Can do. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area that stores correspondence information indicating a correspondence relation between a defective area in the data area and an alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information,
The memory control unit may be stored in the memory, and the memory control unit may store arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. As described above, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area is stored, and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information is stored, thereby reading data from the alternative area. Similarly to the above, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103
Make the necessary initial settings after disabling interrupts. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 10
1 is cleared. Also, a CT built in the game control microcomputer 90100
Set the register of C (counter / timer circuit). As a result, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds).
90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. Game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, game control process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 901. Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

In the game control process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B and setting of opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a predetermined procedure. Normal design process is
Display operation in the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, turning on / off the segment LED)
Is a process that enables variable display of normal symbols, tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like.

The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in command control processing,
Corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 9012. After setting the control data in the output port, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off.
It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. In the game control process shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90 of the game control microcomputer 90100
103 first determines whether or not a start win has occurred (step S9011). As an example, in step S9011, the first start port switch 9022A or the second start port switch 9
It is only necessary to check the input state (on or off) of the start winning signal as a detection signal transmitted from 022B, and to determine that the start winning has occurred if the input state is on.

When a start winning is generated in step S9011 (step S9011; Yes)
The winning random number is stored (step S9012). As an example, in the process of step S9012, a random number circuit 9 built in (or externally attached to) the game control microcomputer 90100.
0104, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, a random counter configured using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, etc. Part or all of the numerical data indicating the game random numbers (random number for determining variable display result, random number for determining game state, random number for determining variation pattern) updated by at least a part is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in a hold random number storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, for example.

Subsequent to the processing in step S9012, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S9013). As an example, in the process of step S <b> 9013, setting for transmitting a start winning designation command for notifying the occurrence of a start winning to the effect control board 9012 may be performed. If no start prize has been generated in step S9011 (step S9011; No), after executing the process of step S9013, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S9021). Then, a process corresponding to the determination value is selected from a plurality of processes previously described in the game control computer program and executed.

For example, when the value of the game process flag is “0”, it is determined whether or not variable symbol display (variable display game) can be started (step S90101). As an example, in the process of step S90101, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the variable display game is “0” by checking the storage content of the hold random number storage unit. At this time, if the number of hold is other than “0”, the variable display is started because the start of the variable display has been satisfied and the variable display has not been started yet. Determine that it is possible.
On the other hand, when the hold number is “0”, it is determined that variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S90101; No), the game control process is terminated.

When variable display can be started in step S90101 (step S90101).
; Yes), a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result is determined (step S901).
02). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is referred to as “special figure display result”.
In the process of step S90102, the game random number (random number for determining the variable display result, random number for determining the game state, fluctuation, etc.) stored in the head (storage area with the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit Read random number for pattern determination). The game random number read from the holding random value storage unit is stored in the RAM 901 in the game control microcomputer 90100.
It may be temporarily stored in a variable display random number buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area 02.
Then, using a random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Here, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a probable variation state, the variable display result determination table is set so that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state. It is sufficient that the determination value is set.

When the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the game state after the end of the big hit gaming state is further changed using the random number value for determining the gaming state and the gaming state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special gaming state. Corresponding to these determination results, a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result may be determined.

Following the process of step S90102, an internal flag and the like are set (step S90).
103). As an example, in the process of step S90103, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the game control microcomputer 9
A big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 at 0100 is set to an on state. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is a certain change state, the RAM 90102 in the gaming control microcomputer 90100
The probability variation confirmation flag provided in the predetermined area may be stored in an identifiable state by setting it to the on state. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “1” (step S90104), and the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is “1”, a variation pattern or the like is determined (step S90111). FIG. 57 shows a setting example of a variation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Each variation pattern indicates that the required time (variable display time) from the start of variable display to the display of a fixed symbol that is a variable display result can be specified and the outline of the production mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the main image display device 905MA is “non-reach” and “reach”. The variable display result is "
A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the case of “big hit”. The variation pattern is for each variation time (variable display time) in the special display game and variable display of decorative designs.
A plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern,
The variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be determined.

In the processing of step S90111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined rate using the variation pattern determination random value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, the variable display result may become “big hit” corresponding to each fluctuation pattern by changing the determination rate of each fluctuation pattern depending on whether or not the variable display result is decided as “big hit” (Big hit reliability) can be varied.

In the process of step S90111, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” by determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”. . Alternatively, prior to determining the variation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by using the reach determination random number value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S90111, it is only necessary to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of reach.

Subsequent to the processing in step S9011, various control commands corresponding to the start of variable display are transmitted (step S90112). As an example, in the process of step S90112,
As a variable display start command for designating the start of variable display, a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result, and a variation for notifying a variation pattern indicating a variable display mode such as a variable display time of a decorative design and a type of reach effect It suffices if settings for transmitting a pattern designation command or the like are made. Further, in response to the decrease in the hold count due to the start of variable display, a setting for transmitting a hold count notification command for notifying the hold count after the decrease may be performed.

The variable display time is set in response to the change pattern being determined by the process of step S90112. In addition, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 90
Setting for starting variable display of the special symbol by any of 4B may be performed. As an example, variable display of symbols may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Which special symbol display device using the special symbol on which special symbol display device is to be executed is a special symbol game based on whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning port or the second starting winning port It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special game is played by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the game ball passing through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, a special game is played by the second special symbol display device 904B. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “2” (step S90113), and the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is “2”, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121). If the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90121; No), the special symbol variable display control is performed (step S901).
22) The game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121; Yes), the variable symbol special display is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the fixed symbol is performed (step S90123).

Subsequent to the processing in step S90123, various control commands corresponding to the end of variable display are transmitted (step S90124). As an example, in the process of step S90124,
Variable display end command to instruct the end (stop) of variable display and variable display result is “big hit”
In this case, a setting for transmitting a jackpot start designation command (fanfare command) for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state may be performed.

After executing the process of step S90124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125). If the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to “3” (step S90126), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display result is not “big hit” but “lost” (step S90125; No)
The game process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S90).
127), the game control process is terminated. When the process of step S90127 is executed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time saving state is to be ended. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming state is ended. Settings for controlling to a normal state may be performed.

When the value of the game process flag is “3”, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit gaming state according to whether or not a predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S90131).
. The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state have ended. When the big hit gaming state is not terminated (step S9013).
1; No) After performing the game operation control at the time of the big hit (step 132), the game control process processing is ended. On the other hand, when ending the big hit gaming state (step S90131; Yes), the setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit ending is performed (step S90133).

As an example, in the process of step S90133, it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation flag is on. If it is on, the RA in the game control microcomputer 90100 is determined.
The probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area of M90102 is set to the on state. This
When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, and it is decided that the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is to be changed into a probable change state, the gaming state is changed according to this determination result. The state can be controlled. Even in the case of controlling to the short time state, a setting corresponding to this may be performed. Then, after clearing the game process flag and initializing its value to “0” (step S90134), the game control process process is terminated.

Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described. The effect control board 9012 receives supply of power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. In the effect control microcomputer 90120 in which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 90130 executes effect control main processing.

In this embodiment, in the effect control main process, the memory test process may be executed when a predetermined memory test condition is satisfied. Memory inspection process is RO
This is a determination process for determining whether the programs and data stored in the M90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are normal. In the memory inspection process, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 901 are executed by executing a checksum process as a determination process.
The stored contents of 23A to 90123C are inspected, and the checksum that is the inspection result can be displayed. The effect control main process includes a process for controlling effects by various effect devices, such as an effect control process that is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt for effect control.

In the production control main process, when a predetermined origin confirmation condition is satisfied,
The origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be confirmed. Movable members 9051-90
The origin position of 54 is a position corresponding to the retracted state as shown in FIG. 38A, for example. Each of 9054 may be determined in advance as a position arranged below main image display device 905MA. When the origin confirmation condition is satisfied, the initial operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is executed, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 are executed.
Control is performed to set each of the positions to the origin position. At this time, based on the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like by the movable member position sensor 9061, it is confirmed whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be stopped at the origin position. And when it cannot be made to stop at an origin position, abnormality notification is performed noting that origin abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90130. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 90130 first checks the connection state of the board (step S9051). In step S9051, for example, it is specified whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the main board 9011 and whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the effect control relay board 9016A. In order to confirm the connection with the main board 9011, the CPU 90130 may determine whether an initialization command or a power recovery command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received after starting the time measurement by the internal timer. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing without receiving an initialization command or a power supply restoration command, it is only necessary to determine that the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected.

FIGS. 59A and 59B show configuration examples for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), the effect control board 9012
Includes a connector (socket) CN1 for physically and electrically connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A by inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 59B, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are inserted into the effect control relay board 9016A by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1. Is provided with a connector (socket) CN2 for physically and electrically connecting the two. Harness HN1
As long as it is configured by bundling a number of wiring cables. Production control board 9012
The connector CN01 provided in the terminal includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 are terminals having numbers corresponding to the terminals CN01 and TN0, respectively, when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11.
It is sufficient if 1) is physically and electrically connected.

FIG. 59C shows a terminal T included in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.
An example of setting input / output contents corresponding to M01 to TM24 is shown. Terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (AC24V is rectified and smoothed), VDL (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). Further, the terminals TM01 to TM24 have a drive control board 9016B and a light emitter control board 90.
Terminals TM03 and TM04 for supplying data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on 16C to 9016F, and terminals TM for transmitting and receiving various data in a serial signal system
05-TM08 and the like are included. Further, of the terminals TM01 to TM24, the terminal TM
22, the signal SM1 used for confirming the connection with the effect control relay board 9016A can be input. As shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, terminals TM20 and TM of the connector CN01.
The voltage of VCL output from 21 is sent through the harness HN1 to the effect control relay board 90.
It is supplied to terminals TN20 and TN21 of the connector CN11 provided in 16A. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 may be short-circuited on the board of the effect control relay board 9016A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, the connector C
A voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of N11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1. On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.

In step S9051 shown in FIG. 58, in order to confirm the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A, the CPU 90130 determines the input state of the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. And the signal SM1
Is a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9
016A is determined to be connected via the harness HN1. On the other hand, if the signal SM1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to no voltage supply, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM22 serving as the connection check terminal.

Based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, the relay board 90 for effect control.
It is determined whether there is a connection with 16A (step S9052). In step S9052, the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is determined to be connected to the effect control relay board 9016A when the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL.
What is necessary is just to determine with no connection with the relay board 9016A for effect control, when M1 is a low voltage state corresponding to voltage non-supply. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is no connection (step S9052; No), the relay unconnected flag is set to ON (step S90).
53). If the relay unconnected flag is prepared in advance in a work memory 90131 built in the effect control microcomputer 90120 or a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 90120. Good. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is a connection, the relay unconnected flag is maintained in the OFF state by not performing the process of step S9053.

Subsequently, based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, the main board 9011.
Whether or not there is a connection is determined (step S9054). In step S9054, it is determined that there is a connection with the main board 9011 when an initialization command or a power recovery command is received before a predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. What is necessary is just to determine with no connection with the main board | substrate 9011, when predetermined time passes, without receiving. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the presence or absence of a connection according to the presence or absence of command reception, but is based on the voltage at a predetermined terminal serving as a connection confirmation terminal in the same manner as the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A. It may be determined whether or not there is a connection with the substrate 9011. If it is determined in step S9054 that there is no connection (step S9054; No)
Then, after executing the memory inspection process (step S9055), a loop process is executed to wait.

In this embodiment, when power supply is started in a state in which a harness that binds cables as command lines for transmitting various control signals between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is not connected. The memory inspection condition is satisfied, and the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055. On the other hand, when the power supply is started in a state where the harness is connected between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, the memory inspection condition is not satisfied, and the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. Thus, the main board 901
The memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state where a cable (harness) serving as a command line attached between 1 and the effect control board 9012 is removed.

Note that the memory inspection condition is not limited to that established when power is turned on with the command line disconnected, and is established, for example, when power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed. There may be. Alternatively, for example, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power in a state where the openable / closable gaming machine frame 903 is opened. In addition, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by detecting a predetermined arbitrary state.

In the memory inspection process in step S9055, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90
A checksum calculation using the stored data of 123A to 90123C is performed, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. When the memory inspection process is executed, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is temporarily turned off, and then the power switch is turned on again with the cable (harness) as the command line connected. The control can be performed. Alternatively, a cable (harness) as a command line may be connected and a reset switch may be pressed so that the production control can be performed without turning on the power again. Alternatively, after the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is once turned off, the power can be turned on in a state where the push button 9031B is not pressed, so that the effect can be controlled. In addition, when a predetermined effect control condition is satisfied, the process may proceed to step S9056 so that the effect can be controlled.

If it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection (step S9054; Yes)
), Initial setting processing (step S9056) is executed. In the initial setting processing in step S9056, for example, the storage area in the RAM 90122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and a CTC (counter and timer circuit) register is set that generates a timer interrupt for effect control. This initial setting process may include an effect data transfer process. In the effect data transfer process, predetermined data (a binary code constituting a program module, etc.) among programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and used to execute effects by various effect devices. Can be transferred to the RAM 90122, the VRAM 90141, or the like. Further, in the initial setting process, execution control of initial operations by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed along with the transfer of the effect data by the effect data transfer process. The initial operation performed at this time is, for example, an operation in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are changed (moved) from the retracted state to the advanced state, stopped in the advanced state until a predetermined time elapses, and then returned to the retracted state. And so on.

After executing the initial setting process in step S9056, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057). If the relay unconnected flag is off (
In step S9057; No), corresponding to the state where the effect control relay board 9016A is connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed (step S90).
58). In this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin abnormality (step S9059). If there is an origin abnormality (step S9059; Yes), the origin abnormality is notified (step S9060), and the process returns to step S9058. In addition, after notifying of the origin abnormality in step S9060, the process may proceed to step S9061.

In step S9058, for example, in order to confirm the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054, the movable member position sensor 9061 is used as a position detection signal for the movable members 9051 to 9054.
The detection signal by is acquired. The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is obtained from the movable member 9.
The result of having detected the position of 051-9054 is shown. In the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 59A, the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 may be included in the signal input to the serial reception terminal TM07. C
The PU 90130 confirms the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 acquired by the general-purpose output controller 90145, and based on the position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054, whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 are at the origin position. I just need to be able to confirm. The notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 is, for example, the main image display device 905M.
A and image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, speakers 908L and 908
Sound output from R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, lighting of notification lamp provided separately from right frame LED 909c, notification operation using other effect devices Alternatively, it may be anything that can be executed by combining some or all of them. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on whether or not the origin is abnormal. As described above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be realized by controlling an arbitrary output.

If it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 and the connector CN11 provided on the harness HN1 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected. The effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this case, connector CN
The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is not input to the terminal TM07 of 01. For this reason, even if the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed, it is determined that the origin is abnormal, and an abnormality notification is executed. In particular, in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, for example, for the purpose of checking the operation of the production control microcomputer 90120, the power supply may be turned on when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. is there. In order to prevent frequent occurrence of abnormality notification in the manufacturing stage and the development stage and improve work efficiency, in response to the determination that the relay unconnected flag is turned on in step S9057, steps S9058 to S9060 are performed. Do not execute. Thereby, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is not confirmed, and the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the origin abnormality is not executed. .

If it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057; Yes), or if it is determined in step S9059 that there is no origin abnormality (
In step S9059; No), an effect random number update process (step S9061) is executed in the effect control main process, and numerical data indicating a random number value to be an effect random number is updated by software. The effect random number is counted as various random values used for effect control.
It should be noted that the effect random number that is updated by hardware using a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 may not be updated in the effect random number update process. Alternatively, the rendering random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random value updated by hardware.

After performing the effect random number update process in step S9061, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state when a timer interrupt for effect control occurs. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9063), and then command analysis processing (step S9064).
) And the effect control process (step S9065) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns to step S9061. Command analysis processing in step S9064 and step S9065
The effect control process is included in the timer interrupt process for effect control. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9062; No), step S90
The processing returns to step S9061 without executing the processing of 63 to S9065.

FIG. 60 shows an example of execution of abnormality notification in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the execution example shown in FIG. 60, the occurrence of the origin abnormality is notified by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. At this time, based on the position detection signal indicating the detection result by the movable member position sensor 9061, which of the upper mechanism (upper accessory) and the lower mechanism (lower accessory) in the effect movable mechanism 9050 is abnormal? May be displayed. As described above, in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of the game hall can recognize which type of anomaly is out of a plurality of types of anomalies configured using a plurality of movable members, the movable member Anomaly notification may be performed.

Note that the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to view or cannot be viewed when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state. For this reason, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is given by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, there is a possibility that the store clerk or the like of the game hall may be difficult or impossible to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, with the image display by the main image display device 905MA or the like, or in place of the image display, using a notification unit that is visible regardless of the state of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed. May be performed. As such a notification unit, for example, it is provided at the upper position, left position, or right position of the gaming machine frame 903, and is included in the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, or top frame LED 909a or left A plurality of notification light emitting members provided separately from the frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c may be used. These notification light emitting members are, for example, LEDs
What is necessary is just to be comprised using. According to a combination of lighting modes by a plurality of notification light emitting members, in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can recognize which kind of an anomaly has occurred,
Abnormality notification of the movable member may be performed. As an example, when the notification unit includes a first notification light emitting member and a second notification light emitting member, an abnormality occurs in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. For example, the lighting control of the notification unit may be performed so that the first notification light emitting member is turned on while the second notification light emitting member is turned on when an abnormality occurs in the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. in this way,
Even if there is a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to recognize depending on the state of the movable member by notifying the abnormality of the movable member by using a notification unit that can be recognized regardless of the state of the movable member,
It is possible to report in a identifiable manner that an abnormality has occurred in the movable member and which movable member an abnormality has occurred.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute an interrupt process for receiving a command in addition to a timer interrupt process for effect control, and can receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. Host interface 90
What is necessary is just to be able to acquire from 132. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, for example. In the command analysis process in step S9064, it is determined whether or not an effect control command has been received. If there is a reception, setting or control corresponding to the received command is performed. In the effect control process in step S9065, for example, an image display for effects on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitter units 9071 to 907 are performed.
4 in a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each other, light emitter units 9071-9
Various rendering devices such as lighting on various light emitting members such as top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c and decoration LED different from 074, and driving operation of operation motors 9060A to 9060C for moving movable members 9051 to 9054 About the operation control content using, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed.

FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S9055 of FIG. 58 as the memory inspection processing. In the memory inspection process, as a checksum calculation using the storage data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the first checksum calculation using the storage data in a plurality of storage areas provided in the ROM 90121 and the storage data in the ROM 90121 Second checksum calculation using all of the above, third checksum calculation using storage data in a plurality of storage areas provided in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and effect data memories 90123A to 9123
Of the fourth checksum calculation using all of the stored data in 0123C, a part or all of the calculations may be executed. In this embodiment, after the second checksum operation is executed following the first checksum operation, an operation using all the stored data in each of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is executed as the fourth checksum operation. Each calculation result is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA.

In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 61A, the CPU 90130 first sets a memory inspection setting table (step S90201). The memory check setting table is a table for setting a checksum calculation start address and a calculation end address by checksum calculation. The table data constituting the memory inspection setting table is, for example, ROM
It may be stored in advance in a predetermined area 90121 (for example, the first storage area).

FIG. 61B shows a configuration example of the memory inspection setting table. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 61B, the checksum calculation start address and calculation end address are designated corresponding to the display counts of “0” to “5”, respectively. The number of times of display is the main image display device 905M.
This is the number of times the checksum is displayed on the screen of A. After “0” is set as the initial value,
It is only necessary to add 1 each time the calculation result by the checksum calculation is displayed.

Subsequent to the setting in step S90201 shown in FIG. 61A, the display count is set to “0” (step S90202). For example, in step S90202, it is only necessary to set the display count value to “0” by clearing (initializing) a display count counter prepared in advance. The display number counter may be configured using a built-in register of the CPU 90130, or may be configured using a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the display count is set (step S90203).
For example, in step S90203, the clear data is set in the checksum data area and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the checksum calculation end address is set to be comparable with the address indicated by the pointer. These parameters may be set in a plurality of registers built in the CPU 90130, or may be set in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

A checksum is calculated using the parameters set in step S90203 (step S90204). For example, in step S90204, the contents of the checksum data area and the ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 9012 indicated by the pointers.
The exclusive OR with the stored data at the address of 3C is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new storage data in the checksum data area, and it is determined whether or not the address indicated by the pointer value has reached the calculation end address. If the calculation end address has not been reached, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and processing returns to the exclusive OR operation. When the calculation end address is reached, the checksum using the storage data from the calculation start address to the calculation end address can be obtained by inverting the value of each bit that is the contents of the checksum data area. .

Along with the checksum calculation in step S90204, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205). If the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205; Yes), the calculation according to the display count is performed. The contents are updated and displayed (step S902).
06). Therefore, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the execution result of the checksum calculation is controlled so that it can be displayed. On the other hand, if the relay unconnected flag is off (step S90205).
No), the process of step S90206 is not executed. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, control is performed so that the execution result of the checksum calculation is not displayed. In step S90206, the calculation contents are updated and displayed, and the determination result by the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal is the main image display device 905MA. It can be displayed on the display device.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S90207). If the checksum calculation is not completed (step S90207; No), the process returns to step S90204 to continue the checksum calculation. When the calculation is completed in step S90207 (step S90207; Yes), the display count is incremented by 1 (step S90208), and then it is determined whether or not the display count has reached the end determination value (step S90209). ). By setting, for example, “6” as the end determination value in advance, six checksum calculation results can be displayed corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. it can. If the end determination value has not been reached (step S90209; No), the process returns to step S90203, and if the end determination value has been reached, the memory inspection process ends.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In this display example, “program ROM” corresponding to the ROM 90121 is obtained as the checksum calculation result corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG.
(A) to (C) and the like are displayed, and the effect data memory 90 is displayed.
Three types of calculation results (A) to (C) are displayed for the “data ROM” corresponding to 123A to 90123C. In the display example of FIG. 62, the progress status (completion rate) of the checksum calculation and the presence / absence of an abnormality based on the calculation result are displayed so as to be confirmed. 62A corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA01 set when the display count is “0” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the first storage area in which the program for effect control and various management data are stored. 62B of “program ROM” shown in FIG. 62 is a calculation start address MA0 set when the display count is “1” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B.
2 and the calculation end address MA10 indicate that the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the second storage area in the ROM 90121 where the audio data is stored. 62C of “Program ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all of the data stored in the ROM 90121. (A of “Data ROM” shown in FIG.
) Corresponds to the calculation start address MA10 + 1 and the calculation end address MA20 set when the display count is “3” in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61B, the stored data in the effect data memory 90123A. The checksum is calculated using all of them. 62B of “data ROM” shown in FIG. 62 is a calculation start address MA20 + 1 set when the display count is “4” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B.
Corresponding to the calculation end address MA30, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123B. 62
(C) of “data ROM” is displayed in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG.
The checksum is calculated using all of the stored data in the effect data memory 90123C corresponding to the calculation start address MA30 + 1 and the calculation end address MA40 set in the case of “5”.

The checksum calculation results are stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123.
It differs depending on the contents of the stored data in 123C. For example, ROM90121
And production data memories 90123A to 90123C are EEPROM or NAND-RO
In the case of a non-volatile semiconductor memory such as M that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, the version of the program for effect control and various data stored in the ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Depending on, different checksum operation results are obtained. A memory check process as shown in FIG. 61A is executed to display the checksum calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, so that the ROM 90121 can be used in the manufacturing and development stages of the pachinko gaming machine 901. And production data memory 901
It is possible to easily confirm the version of the program for effect control and various data stored in 23A to 90123C. Thereby, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 9
The version management of stored data in 0123A to 90123C is facilitated, and for example, it is possible to reliably prevent inconsistency between the production control program and the version of audio data, image data, and the like. In addition to the checksum calculation result, version information indicating the version of the program for effect control and various data may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The version information is stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90.
What is necessary is just to be previously memorize | stored in the predetermined area | region of 123A-90123C. By displaying the version information along with the checksum calculation result, it is easier to check the version of the production control program and various data, and whether the stored data is incorrect by reading the checksum corresponding to the version It can be easily confirmed whether or not.

Note that the stored data used for the checksum calculation, the number of times the checksum is displayed, etc.
It may be arbitrarily changed according to the setting of the memory inspection for M90121, the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like. As an example, in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B, the checksum calculation corresponding to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” is not executed. By setting, the calculation result may be displayed for a smaller checksum. Alternatively, by adding the setting of the calculation start address and the calculation end address corresponding to the display count “6” or more, the calculation results may be displayed for more checksums.

The memory inspection process shown in FIG. 61A is the step S of the effect control main process shown in FIG.
If it is determined in 9054 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, the process is executed in step S9055. If it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is on, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are displayed.
And are not connected. Therefore, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, step S902 is performed.
The update display by 06 becomes possible, and the determination result of the program and data based on the checksum calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, step S90 is executed.
The memory inspection process 55 is not executed. Even when the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is off, an update display in step S90206 is performed. I will not.
As a result, if only one of the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 is not connected to the production control board 9012, the determination result of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is not displayed. To control.

Instead of the update display of the calculation content in step S90206, or together with the update display of the calculation content, arbitrary notification based on the checksum calculation result may be performed. For example, instead of the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, or together with this image display, the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, the speaker 908
Audio output from L, 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 9
09c or the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are lit by a notification lamp, a notification operation using other effect devices, a combination of these or a combination of these, etc. Memory 90123A-90
The notification which can specify the determination result of the determination process which determines whether the production data memorize | stored in 123C is normal may be performed. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on the checksum calculation result.
Thus, the determination result as to whether or not the production data is normal may be any information that can be notified by controlling an arbitrary output.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S9065 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines whether or not it is the BGM change timing (step S90151). For example, the CPU 90130 has a main board 9011.
It may be determined that it is the BGM change timing when a predetermined BGM change condition is satisfied based on the effect control command transmitted from the. As an example, the BGM change condition only needs to be set so as to be satisfied when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state.

If it is determined in step S90151 that it is the BGM change timing (step S90151; Yes), the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music to be played back as BGM are specified (step S90152). For example, in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121, the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123 for sound data corresponding to music to be reproduced as BGM for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901.
A BGM setting table including data indicating that the start address and end address in A can be specified may be stored in advance. The CPU 90130 may specify the start address and end address of the audio data by referring to the BGM setting table according to the gaming state specified based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

Subsequent to the processing in step S90152, loop reproduction start control for starting loop reproduction in which the music to be BGM is repeatedly reproduced is performed (step S90153). For example, CP
U90130 notifies the audio processing circuit 90143 of a command indicating an instruction for loop reproduction together with the start address and end address of the audio data specified in step S90152. In the audio processing circuit 90143, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90
It suffices if the audio data can be read from the section of the start address and the end address indicated by the instruction from the CPU 90130 by accessing 123A. Then, according to the designation to perform loop playback, the music corresponding to the audio data is sequentially played back from the beginning, and when the end of the music is played back, the playback of the music may be repeated by returning to the beginning.

With the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, for example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the music as the normal BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probability variation state, the music as the probability variation BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the short-time state, the music as the short-time BGM can be repeatedly reproduced.

When it is determined in step S90151 that it is not the BGM change timing (step S90151; No), after executing the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, processing according to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130
Determines the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and from a plurality of processes described in advance in the effect control program,
A process corresponding to the judgment value is selected and executed. The processing executed according to the determination value of the effect process flag includes the processing of steps S90170 to S90176.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received, and the variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The process etc. which determine whether to start are included. The first variation start command is the first special symbol display device 9
This is an effect control command for notifying that a special figure game using the first special figure by 04A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is performed by the first special symbol display device 90.
Corresponding to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by 4A or the second special symbol display device 904B, variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and various other effects operations In order to perform the process, a process of determining a fixed decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like are included. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 90130 is a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 (such as an effect control timer setting unit).
In response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in FIG. 4, various control data is read from the effect control pattern, and various kinds of effect control during variable display of decorative symbols are included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011, etc., the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to display (derived display) is included.
Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed,
Even without using the effect control command from the main board 9011, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the effect control board 9012 side. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process starts the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command or the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. The process which determines whether it is performed is included. When the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while the variable display result corresponds to “lost”. If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Yes. When the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

The big hit effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit effect processing, for example, the CPU 90130 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit effect executed in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set contents in the main image display device. 905M
A or the sub-image display device 905SU is displayed on the screen, or the light emitter units 9071-9.
By executing a display effect by 074, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound output board 9013, and outputting electric decoration signals to the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. The top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked, and other effect control is executed to enable execution of a big hit effect corresponding to the big hit game state. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

The big hit end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect process, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot end effect (ending effect) executed when the jackpot game state ends, and an effect image based on the set content Display, output of fruit sounds, turning on / off or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations are performed to enable execution of a jackpot end effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG.
First, 130 determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a final symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S90401). As a process of step S90401, the CPU 90
130 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative design does not reach the reach state, the fixed decorative design of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “
It will be “losing”. When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the fixed decorative design of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed after the variable display state of the decorative design becomes the reach state.
The variable display result is “lost”. When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the CPU 90130 determines different (unmatched) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 is a production control microcomputer 9012.
A random number circuit incorporated in (or externally attached to) 0, a work memory 90131, or a RAM 90
Numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol is extracted from the effect random numbers updated by the effect random counter provided in the predetermined area 122 (the effect control counter setting unit or the like) and stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. By referring to the left determined symbol determination table stored and prepared, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol is extracted from the random numbers for presentation, and by referring to a right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, etc. Out of which “Right” decorative symbol display area 5R
The right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed. Out of which “Medium” decorative symbol display area 5
The medium fixed decorative design that is stopped and displayed on C is determined.

When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the CPU 131 determines the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols from the random numbers for rendering, and by referring to the left and right determined symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 and the like, Among them, the decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined.
Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and RO
By referring to the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in M90121, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, the CPU 90
Reference numeral 130 denotes a decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, or 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right”.
The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. CPU90130 extracts the numerical data which shows the random number value for jackpot fixed symbol determination among the random numbers for production. Next, R
By referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the OM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905 are displayed.
A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative design (depicted decorative design) and the probability variation design (for example, the decorative design indicating an odd number) is the final decorative design.
In the jackpot promotion promotion, a combination of decorative symbols (non-probable big hit combination) that recalls a big hit but does not recall a promiscuous state is once stopped and displayed in a promising state during the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state. This is an effect to notify whether or not.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, the variable display content is "
If it is determined that the promotion effect during the big hit is to be executed even if it is “probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

In the process of step S90401, when the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redraw lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, Decorative design is variably displayed again (change again)
In this way, it is possible to notify that the control of the probability variation state is controlled by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination comprising the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S90401, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, a notice effect is determined (step S90402). In step S90402, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect or the effect mode when the notice effect is executed may be determined using a notice effect determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121, for example. In the notice effect determination table, for example, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number for determining the notice effect may be assigned to the presence / absence of the notice effect or the determination result of the effect mode according to the variable display content. . CPU90
130 is based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the notice effect among the random numbers for effect,
By referring to the notice effect determination table, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode may be determined.

Following the determination of the notice effect in step S90402, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90403). For example, CPU90
In response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command 130, one of a plurality of special figure variation effect control patterns prepared is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns corresponding to the determination result of the notice effect produced by the process of step S90402, and sets it as a use pattern.

After determining the effect control pattern in step S90403, the CPU 90130 is provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S90404). Then, a setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the main image display device 905MA is performed (
Step S90405). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S90404 is transmitted to the VDP 90140, etc., and provided on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C
, 905R may start the decoration pattern change.

Following the process of step S90405, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, settings are made to update the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H (
Step S90406). For example, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” in the start winning memory display area 905H may be deleted and the entire display part may be moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S90407), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 65A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 65A, the effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is composed of process data including The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the production control process timer determination value, for example, the main board 9
Corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents such as reception of a predetermined effect control command from 011 and execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 And the data which show the switching timing of production control etc. may be set up. Pattern data constituting such an effect control pattern may be stored in advance in the ROM 90121 as management data.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. It is. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Even if display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. Good. In this case, if the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is designated by the display control data, the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters arranged in a line to constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 Can also be specified. It is not limited to what designates the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by the display control data, and the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters is controlled using control data different from the display control data. May be specified.

The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects or the like in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. Yes. That is, the voice control data is transmitted from the speaker 90.
This is data for designating an audio output operation from 8L and 908R. For example, the audio control data only needs to indicate various settings such as whether or not to perform loop playback in addition to the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. .

The light emitter control data includes, for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and a decoration LED.
The data which shows the lighting operation | movement aspect in various light emitting members are included. That is, the light emitter control data is data that specifies lighting operations of various light emitting members. The movable member control data includes, for example, movable members 9051 to 905 such as data indicating a driving mode of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for rotating and moving the movable members 9051 to 9054.
Data indicating four operation modes is included. In other words, the movable member control data is data for designating the rotation operation and the movement operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054. In the operation detection control data, for example, an instruction operation (tilting operation) with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A
And an effective operation period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button, an effective operation period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (push-down operation) for the push button 9031B, and each operation is detected effectively. In this case, data indicating an effect operation mode according to the player's operation action, such as data designating the control content of the effect operation in the case, is included.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, if there is process data that includes all of display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, process data that includes a part of these process data There may be. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, production model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member included in the production model may be included.

FIG. 65 (B) shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. In addition, the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are specified by the display control data.
Control may be performed to turn on a plurality of light emitters arranged in a row and execute a display effect. Furthermore, while performing control to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R in a mode specified by the audio control data, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in a mode specified by the light emitter control data, Top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909
b. Control of blinking various light emitting members such as the right frame LED 909c, and the operation on the trigger button, the operation rod or the push button 9031B of the stick controller 9031A is accepted during the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. Control to determine. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. The storage address of the pattern data constituting the pattern in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the CPU 90130 performs the rendering device (in accordance with the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the rendering control pattern.
Main image display device 905MA, sub image display device 905SU, light emitter unit 9071
To 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, various light emitting members including the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable members 9051 to 9054, the decorative member 9057, etc. ) Control proceeds. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n,
Audio control data # 1 to audio control data #n, light emitter control data # 1 to light emitter control data #
n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and specify the execution of the rendering control Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to the VDP 90140, the audio processing circuit 90143, the general-purpose output controller 90145, and the like. The VDP 90140 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 reads the image data (image element data) indicated by the command from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stores them in the work area of the VRAM 90141. In addition, the VDP 90140 uses the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905S based on the image data stored in the work area of the VRAM 90141.
The image data corresponding to the display screen of U is selected, the selected image data is converted into pixel data, etc., and a predetermined position in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141 (information indicating the display position in the display area such as the main image display device 905MA) (Position indicated by etc.). As a result, display data for one screen is created in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141. At this time, display data used to create lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU. In addition, the voice processing circuit 9 that has received a command from the CPU 90130
In 0143, the voice data indicated in the command is acquired and expanded by temporarily storing it in the voice RAM or the like.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG.
First, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the production control process timer value or the like (step S90451). As an example, in step S90451, the presentation control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and variable display is performed when an end code is read from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the updated presentation control process timer value. What is necessary is just to determine with time having passed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S904).
51; No), it is determined whether it is a super reach production start timing (step S).
90452). The super reach production start timing is a timing at which execution of the reach production in the super reach is started, and may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 64, for example. If it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452; Yes), BGM off setting is performed (step S90453). For example, the CPU 90130 has an audio processing circuit 901.
In response to a command to 43, the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM is set to OFF. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn off the output. In the period in which the BGM is off, the music corresponding to the BGM may be continuously played back by merely setting the BGM volume to off. Or BG
During a period in which M is off, the reproduction of music corresponding to BGM may be paused.
After performing the BGM off setting in step S90453, the music on setting for super reach production is performed (step S90454). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the start address and the end address of the audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production by a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. The audio processing circuit 90143 acquires audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production based on the start address and end address of the audio data notified by the instruction from the CPU 90130. Then, while setting the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to ON, the music corresponding to the audio data may be reproduced sequentially from the top.

If it is not the super reach production start timing in step S90452 (step S90452; No), or after performing the music on setting in step S90454, it is determined whether it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455). The super reach production end timing is a timing for ending the execution of the reach production in the super reach, and may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 64, for example. When it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455; Yes), the music off setting for the super reach production is performed (step S90456). For example, the CPU 90130 has the voice processing circuit 9
In response to a command to 0143, the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production is set off. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the music for super reach production may be set off and the reproduction of the music or the like may be terminated. After performing the music off setting for super reach production in step S90456,
GM on setting is performed (step S90457). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to ON according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the BGM volume may be changed and the output may be turned on.

If it is not the super reach production end timing in step S90455 (step S90455; No), or after performing the BGM on setting in step S90457,
For example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative design is performed (step S9).
0458), the variable display effect process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451;
Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90459). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90459; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S90459 (step S90)
459; Yes), for example, the final stop symbol (determined symbol) that is the display result in the variable symbol display such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 90140.
Is controlled to be derived and displayed (step S90460). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S90461). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90462), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 66, after the music-off setting for the super reach effect is performed in step S90456, the BGM-on setting is immediately performed in step S90457. On the other hand, the BGM on setting may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the music off setting is performed in step S90456. For example, the BGM on setting may be performed after the control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol in step S90460. Alternatively, the BGM on setting may be performed when the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 shown in FIG. 63 is executed. In particular, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable display result is “
It is also possible to play a fanfare effect tune that informs the player that the game is a “hit”, and then play the song for the big hit effect in response to the game state becoming a big win game state. Note that the music for the super reach production may be directly played as the music for the big hit production as it is. In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, if the BGM on setting is performed corresponding to the execution of the variable display start waiting process of step S90170 shown in FIG. Good. As a result, the variable display result is "
In the case of “big hit”, the reproduction of the music to be BGM can be started smoothly.

In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 66, based on the effect control process timer value from the effect control pattern (for example, the special figure changing effect control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. Using the process data acquired in this way, control for executing the rendering operation by various rendering devices is performed. Step S shown in FIG.
Also in the big hit effect processing in 90175 and the big hit end production processing in step S90176, the CPU 90130 reads out the production control pattern from the ROM 90121 and the like, and uses various process devices using process data acquired based on the production control process timer value. What is necessary is just to make it control for performing presentation operation | movement.

In order to perform such effect control, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out, and switches the effect control execution data in the process data when time-out occurs. That is, process data # 1 as shown in FIG.
In the process data #n, based on the display control data set next, together with the display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, a plurality of light emission units arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged. Body lighting control may be performed. Also, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, audio output control of the speakers 908L and 908R is performed based on the audio control data set next. Further, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on the light emitter control data set next, and the top frame L
Lighting control of the ED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED is performed. In process data # 1 to process data #n, drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed based on the movable member control data set next. In addition, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, the stick controller 9031A and the push button 903 are set based on the operation detection control data set next.
Detection control of instruction operation by 1B is performed.

In the production control microcomputer 90120, the VDP 90140 is a CPU 9
Based on the display control command from 0130, various image data such as character image data necessary for displaying the effect image is read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, and arranged in a predetermined area of the VRAM 90141. When the effect image is displayed, the same character image may be repeatedly displayed many times. Production data memory 90123A, 90
When the image data stored in 123B is compressed, it takes time to decompress it after reading it. Therefore, by placing necessary character image data in the storage area of the VRAM 90141 at the stage of starting the display of the effect image, it is compared with reading out from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B corresponding to each frame. The time required for drawing can be shortened.

CPU90130, whenever the display of the effect image is started and V blank occurs,
An attribute is set in the attribute register of the VDP 90140 and an instruction to read the attribute is given. In response to this, the VDP 90140 reads the attribute. When this reading is completed, a reading end interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130. When the CPU 90130 receives the reading end interrupt signal, the CPU 90130 instructs the execution of the drawing process. Thus, the VDP 90140 executes a drawing process by writing display data to the VRAM 90141 according to the read attribute.

In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer are assigned to each of a plurality of storage areas to which an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 800 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 600 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the main frame buffer. The sub-frame buffer includes a sub-image display device 9.
Display data for displaying an image on the screen of 05SU may be stored, and display data used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be stored. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 480 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 885 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the subframe buffer.

Image data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 corresponds to an image size of 320 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 320 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction), for example. Yes. The VDP 90140 reduces the image data for lighting data creation to an image size of 80 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 80 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The reduced image size is the light emitter unit 907 in which a plurality of light emitters are arranged and arranged.
It corresponds to a resolution of 1 to 9074. Thus, the image data for lighting data creation is
It has a resolution higher than that of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As an example, anti-aliasing processing such as supersampling is performed. As another example, the RGB value corresponding to the upper left dot is obtained and displayed as the display data for each rectangular range of 4 dots × 4 dots in the vertical and horizontal directions in the image data, so that the vertical and horizontal directions are each 1/4. Display data reduced in size may be created. In this way, display data to be converted into lighting data is created using image data having a resolution higher than the display resolution of the plurality of light emitters.
Thereby, for example, jaggy generated in the contour of a character image or the like can be suppressed, and the smoothness of display in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be enhanced. In particular, when an effect image such as a character image is moved and displayed, the contour portion can be displayed smoothly, and the interest of the display effect in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. Note that the image size reduction may be performed in the image data transformation process or display data rendering process by the VDP 90140, or may be performed using a predetermined scaler circuit. The scaler circuit only needs to be able to reduce the image size at a predetermined reduction ratio (for example, 1/4) by converting the number of pixels of the display data read from the VRAM 90141. As described above, the size change of the display data may be realized by a hardware circuit, or may be realized by executing a predetermined program as software.

The image data read by the VDP 90140 may be used to create lighting data by being written in a predetermined area (light emitter lighting data area) in the subframe buffer. On the other hand, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA by being written in the main frame buffer. Further, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU by being written in an area other than the light emitter lighting data area in the subframe buffer. Thus, even if the same image data, VR
What is necessary is just to be able to make a use differ according to the writing position in AM90141. Thus, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B are read out and the VRAM 9014 is read out.
The image data temporarily stored in 1 is for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or the light emitter units 9071 to 907.
As long as it can also be used for creating lighting data for controlling the lighting of 4. Accordingly, the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B includes at least the effect image display control in the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU and the lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It can be used for either control.

The display data stored in the subframe buffer is, for example, 1 frame for 1/60 seconds (
(About 16.7 milliseconds). As a result, the sub-image display device 905SU is reduced to 1/6.
The display image can be updated with a frame period of 0 seconds. If the data for controlling the illuminant is also added to the data for displaying the sub-image, it can be output at a period of 1/60 seconds. In the light emitter control board 9016C, the effect control board 90 is provided via the effect control relay board 9016A.
The display data transmitted from 12 is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151. Therefore, the buffer memory 90151 may store data for controlling the light emitter at a 1/60 second period in which the VDP 90140 outputs display data for one frame.

In the light emitter control board 9016C, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a shorter cycle than a frame cycle (such as 1/60 second) of an image display device using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) such as the sub image display device 905SU. Lighting data for lighting control of a plurality of light emitters may be generated. As a specific example, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 is 1/1.
Lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter is generated at a cycle of 20 seconds (about 8.3 milliseconds).
As described above, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data of the light emitter in a cycle (1/120 seconds) shorter than the output cycle (1/60 seconds) of the display data by the VDP 90140, and the serial output circuit 90153 A control signal based on the lighting data is output. In this case, the buffer memory 90151 has light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame output from the VDP 90140, that is, 80 dots × 8.
It is only necessary to have a storage data capacity capable of storing 0-dot light emitter control data. Moreover, the light emitters 9071 to 9074 are turned on by turning on the light emitters in a relatively short period.
It is possible to suppress flicker (flickering) in a display effect executed by a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each other, and to improve the interest of the display effect. Lighting control of the light emitter
The cycle is not limited to a cycle that is half the display data output cycle. For example, the cycle is shorter than the display data output cycle, such as a shorter cycle (eg, 1/3 cycle). Anything can be done.

The serial output circuit 90153 has the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 in a cycle longer than the time required for the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame to be written in the buffer memory 90151. It may be set to output a control signal corresponding to the data. In this manner, the light emission control data corresponding to one frame is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 in a time shorter than the cycle in which the control signal corresponding to the lighting data is output. As a result, even when the buffer memory 90151 having a storage data capacity capable of temporarily storing light emission control data corresponding to one frame is used, the lighting data can be stored in a time shorter than the output period of the control signal corresponding to the lighting data. Generation can be completed.

Note that the buffer memory 90151 has a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for a plurality of frames, such as display data corresponding to image display for two frames. It may be. In this case, the buffer memory 9
A plurality of buffer areas are allocated to the storage area 0151. Each buffer area is 1
It is only necessary to have a storage data capacity capable of storing the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the frame image display.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides the data into a plurality of data ranges according to the storage position (reading address or the like) of the buffer memory 90151 storing the light emission control data. For example, the storage area of the buffer memory 90151 is divided into a plurality of buffer memory areas according to the storage address. The lighting data generation circuit 90152
Based on which data stored in the buffer memory area is read, it is specified which of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42 is to be converted into lighting data of the light emitter included in any light emitter block.

The display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is assigned to any one of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 for each data range divided into a plurality. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 can specify the data range assigned to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 by referring to an address specification table serving as conversion setting information prepared in advance. Based on this identification result, address information of the light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block B01 to B42 can be designated. The address specifying table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including address information and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output the lighting data to the light emitter driving unit 90154.

In addition, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes gradation data indicating the gradation control amount of each light emitting element constituting each of the plurality of light emitters. For example, the gradation data only needs to indicate the output period (pulse width) of the pulse signal in PWM control as the gradation control amount. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes a buffer memory 90
By referring to the lighting data generation table serving as color conversion setting information prepared in advance based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data read from 151,
Gradation data indicating the gradation control amount is generated. The lighting data generation table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152.

The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 corresponds to the number of gradations smaller than the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data used for the conversion. For example, the display data that is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A and temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). 2 so that the luminance (gradation) is any level from “0” to “255”.
Gradation can be controlled in 56 steps. Thus, the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is “256”. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a luminance (gradation) of any one of “0” to “63” for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). 64 so that
Enables gradation control in stages. Thus, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 indicates the number of gradations of “64” which is smaller than “256”.

The correspondence relationship between the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data and the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter is the light emission corresponding to each emission color. It may be determined in advance in consideration of element characteristics (for example, light emission efficiency) and white balance. As an example, a light-emitting diode serving as a light-emitting element constituting each light-emitting body has nonlinear characteristics in which the amount of current increases rapidly when the applied voltage reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, if converted to a gradation control amount proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, there is a risk that display inconveniences caused by a plurality of light emitters such as overexposure and blackout may occur. is there. Therefore, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emitting elements corresponding to the respective light emission colors constituting each of the plurality of light emitters have a light emission amount equivalent to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. The setting information for converting to may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

FIG. 67 shows a configuration example of the lighting data generation table TC1 referred to by the lighting data generation circuit 90152. In the lighting data generation table TC1, each display color level (R) indicated by the lighting data corresponding to each display color level (RGB value) indicated by the display data.
GB value) is set. Here, R (red), G (green), B (
For each display color of blue), when the luminance (gradation) is any level from “0” to “10”, the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is “ The table data may be configured to have a level of “0”. That is, for each light emitting element of each display color included in one light emitter corresponding to one dot, when the brightness (gradation) indicated in the display data is “10” or less, the brightness of each display color By generating lighting data in which (gradation) is “0”, a restriction is provided so that the light emitter is not lit.

On the other hand, the lighting data generation table TC1 has R (red) and G (green) indicated by display data.
, B (blue), when at least one of the luminances (gradation) is a level of “11” or more, it is proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. R
The table data may be configured so that lighting data indicating the GB value is generated. For example, when the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the display data is “11”, the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is “2”. If the luminance of R (red) or G (green) indicated by the display data is “0” to “3”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “4” is generated. If “7”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “1” is generated, and if “8”-“11”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “2” is generated. Thus, the table data of the lighting data generation table TC1 is configured.

The image data that the VDP 90140 reads from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B by the effect control microcomputer 90120 is the main image display device 905MA.
Alternatively, for the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU and the light emitter unit 90.
It may also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting of 71 to 9074. At this time, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data created from the image data used for image display is less than a predetermined amount, the same proportional relationship as when the luminance is greater than the predetermined amount When generating the lighting data below, the influence of nonlinear characteristics in the light emitting diode becomes significant,
An unnatural display effect may be performed. Therefore, according to the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data, when the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited so that the light emitter is not turned on. Thus, the lighting control is made different between the light emitters whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount and the light emitters whose amount is the predetermined amount or more among the plurality of light emitters. In particular, in this embodiment, a light emitter whose light emission amount is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount is provided with a restriction so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. The lighting control is performed according to the RGB value of the lighting data that is proportional to the RGB value of the display data. In this way, by varying the lighting control depending on whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, the influence due to the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is reduced, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the display effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the production.

A plurality of types of lighting data generation tables are prepared in advance, and based on a predetermined selection setting,
Any lighting data generation table may be selected as the use table. In this case, a different lighting data generation table may be selected for each light emission color of the light emitting element included in each light emitter. For example, in the case of the light emitter blocks B01 to B06, the lighting data generation table TR01 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG01 is selected according to the emission color G (green). Lighting data generation table TB according to the color B (blue)
01 is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the light emitter blocks B07, B08, and B15, the lighting data generation table TR02 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the emission color is G (green).
Accordingly, the lighting data generation table TG02 is selected, and the lighting data generation table TB02 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). In the case of the light emitter blocks B09 to B14, the lighting data generation table TR03 is selected according to the light emission color R (red), and the light emission color is G.
The lighting data generation table TG03 is selected according to (green), and the lighting data generation table TB03 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Each lighting data generation table is
Table data that converts the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data created by the VDP 141 into the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter is included. It only has to be configured. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is designated by the lighting data by referring to the selected lighting data generation table based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. The gradation control amount is determined.

The characteristics of the light emitting element may differ depending on the emission color. Therefore, the display data is converted so that the correspondence with the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is converted into a gradation control amount depending on the emission color of each light emitting element constituting the light emitter. Setting information for converting from to lighting data may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

What is necessary is that display data can be converted into lighting data using a lighting data generation table that differs depending on the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block. Light emitter unit 90
In each of 71 to 9074, even if light is emitted at the same gradation according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters, depending on the size of the region in which the plurality of light emitters are arranged and arranged, the front-rear relationship of each light emitter unit, and the like. The player may have a different impression. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emission amount can give an impression as uniform as possible corresponding to the same display color. Setting information for conversion to is stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

In this way, not only the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data but also the respective light emitters according to the light emission characteristics of each of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting the light emitter, the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters, and the like. Gradation data indicating a gradation control amount corresponding to is generated. Thereby, the light emitters including a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emission colors can be obtained by the light emitter units 9071 to 907.
Even in the case of being arranged in a predetermined area of 4, the reproducibility of the color is improved and the interest of the production is improved.

Note that not all lighting data is generated by referring to the lighting data generation table, and at least a part of the lighting data is generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 executing a predetermined data processing program. May be. For example, for each of the R (red), G (green), and B (blue) display colors indicated in the display data, it is determined whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, and any light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount. In such a case, a process of generating lighting data with luminance (gradation) of “0” may be executed so that the light emitter is not turned on.

As an example, in the lighting data generation process executed by the lighting data generation circuit 90152,
Display data for one dot is acquired, and all the RGB values indicated by the display data are “10”.
It is determined whether or not. If all the values are “10” or less, the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”. On the other hand, when at least one of the RGB values indicated by the display data is not “10” or less, the lighting data generation table corresponding to the light emitter block and the light emission color is selected. Subsequently, lighting data corresponding to the display data is generated using the selected lighting data generation table. Then, it is determined whether or not the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots has been completed. If the generation of lighting data has not yet been completed, display data corresponding to the next one dot is acquired, and the same processing is performed. You only need to repeat it. on the other hand,
When the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots is completed, the lighting data generation process may be terminated.

The lighting data generation process is not limited to the generation of lighting data by referring to the lighting data generation table, and the lighting data may be generated by executing a predetermined arithmetic processing program. For example, in display data that enables gradation control in 256 steps for each display color, the luminance (gradation) of each display color is represented by 8 bits when binary display is used. on the other hand,
In the lighting data that enables gradation control in 64 steps for each display color, the luminance (gradation) of each display color is represented by 6 bits when binary display is used. Therefore, RG indicated by the display data
When at least one of the B values is not equal to or less than “10”, the lighting data is obtained by performing numerical processing for discarding the lower 2 bits of the 8-bit data indicating the luminance (gradation) of each display color in the display data. It may be generated. Alternatively, lighting data corresponding to the display data may be generated according to a preset arithmetic expression. Prepare in advance several types of arithmetic processing programs that can be used to convert display data to lighting data.
The lighting data generation circuit 90152 may convert the display data into lighting data by selecting and executing one of the arithmetic processing programs according to the display color and arrangement (light emitter block, etc.) of the light emitting elements.

The display data is acquired for each dot and is not limited to the setting and generation of lighting data. For example, the setting and generation of lighting data may be performed collectively by using predetermined mask data. In this case, with respect to one frame of display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151, dots having all RGB values of “10” or less are detected, and RGB in the lighting data corresponding to the detected dots is detected. Mask data for setting all values to “0” may be prepared in advance.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the case where all the RGB values in the lighting data are set to “0” when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are all “10” or less.
If any of the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot is “10” or less, only the lighting data corresponding to the display color is set to “0”. Also good. As an example, the brightness (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “100”, G (green)
When the brightness (gradation) of “8” and the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) are “2”, the brightness (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the lighting data is “25”. On the other hand, the table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 A predetermined arithmetic processing program may be executed. In this manner, for each light emitting element of each display color in the light emitter, a restriction may be provided so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter that causes the light emission amount to be less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. However, if there is a display color with an RGB value of “10” or less among the display data for one dot, the color of the emission color is set when the RGB value in the lighting data for only that display color is set to “0”. May change. Therefore, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are all “10” or less, the RGB values in the lighting data are all “0”.
It is desirable to set so that “

Alternatively, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are added and the total value is less than a predetermined value, the RGB values in the lighting data may all be set to “0”. As an example, when the total value obtained by adding the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data is “30” or less, the lighting data indicates R (red),
The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured such that the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is all “0”, and the lighting data generation circuit 90152 performs predetermined calculation processing. The program may be executed. In this case, even if the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “11”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “0”. If so, the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is all “0”. In this way, the total amount of light emitted by a plurality of light emitting elements constituting one light emitter (
By providing a restriction so as not to perform lighting control of the illuminant whose total amount is less than a predetermined amount, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display effect and to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect. .

In addition, according to the RGB value of the display data, the light emission amount is not limited to the one that does not perform the lighting control of the light emitter that is less than the predetermined amount. For example, the influence due to the non-linear characteristic of the light emitting element is considered. Arbitrary restrictions may be provided. As an example, if the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is “0” to “8”, the luminance (gradation) is “0”.
The lighting data generation table is configured so that lighting data indicating “1” is generated and lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “1” is generated if the lighting data indicates “9” or “10”. Alternatively, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. As described above, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited to be performed with a correspondence relationship different from the proportional relationship when the display color is greater than the predetermined amount. May be provided. Further, the threshold value of whether or not the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than the predetermined amount is not limited to the RGB value in the display data being “10”, and considering the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element, etc. Any value may be set. Depending on the light emission color (display color) of the light emitting element, the threshold for determining whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount may be set differently.

The image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is not limited to that used for both display control and lighting control, and dedicated image data is prepared in order to create lighting data. 90123A and 90123B may be stored. In this case, the image data is set in advance so that when the lighting data is generated in a proportional relationship with the display data, the illuminant whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without lighting control. You may make it do. Lighting data may be created using the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C. Also in this case, the light emission data may be set in advance so that the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without the lighting control.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including gradation data to which address information assigned to the light emitter driver on the digit upper side or the digit lower side is added,
The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the light to the light emitter driver 90154. Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data for performing dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including drive control data to which address information assigned to the strobe-side light emitter driver is added, and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output the light data to the light emitter driver 90154.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a common clock signal to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21 as the serial clock SC shown in FIG. The serial clock SC output from the serial output circuit 90153 is supplied to each of the plurality of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter driver 90154 via the serial signal wiring. Each light emitter driver receives serial data SD transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock SC.
Receive.

On the other hand, the serial output circuit 90153 may output a control signal including drive control data and gradation data at different timings as serial data SD depending on each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. When a control signal is output to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 at the same timing, lighting control of a large number of light emitters at the same timing is performed by a large number of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter drive unit 90154. May be started. In this case, a large amount of drive current flows as an inrush current in a short period of time, which may cause radio interference due to noise radio waves. In addition, the manufacturing cost may increase as a power supply circuit for generating a large amount of drive current is required. On the contrary,
The control signal that becomes the serial data SD is output at different timings according to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21, thereby suppressing the generation of inrush current and preventing the generation of noise radio waves and the increase in manufacturing cost. can do.

In the light emitter driver 90154, each light emitter driver receives the received serial data SD.
It is confirmed whether or not the light emitter driver address indicated by the address information included in the data matches the light emitter driver address assigned to itself. At this time, if they match, serial data SD as drive control data and gradation data is taken in and converted into parallel data, and lighting control of the light emitter is performed based on this. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. Further, the light emitter driver on the upper side or the lower side of the digit outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data, thereby controlling the gradation of the plurality of light emitters connected to the digit signal line. Thus, the dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters is performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 included in the movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050 are aligned. The display effect by the lighting mode of the several light-emitting body arrange | positioned is performed.

As an example of a specific display effect by the effect moving mechanism 9050, in the retracted state (first state) in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect moving mechanism 9050 are separated and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is visible. The display effect using the plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 that can be visually recognized by the player is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the retracted state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are positioned above and the movable members 9053 and 9054 are positioned below. Thus, the movable member 905
When the 1-9054 is in the retracted state where it is not rotating (when stopped), only the light emitters that are visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901 among the plurality of light emitters are controlled to be lit.
Thereby, power consumption can be reduced. As the display effect by the lighting control of the light emitters, for example, characters and symbols are displayed, or blinking and light emission colors of a plurality of light emitters are moved in a predetermined order, so that the display can be adjusted according to the variable display by the main image display device 905MA. A display effect or the like may be executed. When the reach effect is executed, the movable member 9
At least one of 051 to 9054 may be moved (vibrated, advanced, etc.), or a character or symbol such as “reach” may be displayed using a plurality of light emitters.

On the other hand, the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other and the main image display device 9.
In the advanced state (second state) in which the 05MA display screen is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized, a display effect using all of the plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 is displayed by the main image display device 905MA. In conjunction with the main image display device 905MA
It is executed independently of the display effect by In the advanced state, the production movable mechanism 9050
As the decorative member 9057 moves downward in the upper mechanism, the movable members 9051 and 905 are moved.
2 is rotated and the movable members 9053 and 9054 of the lower mechanism are positioned upward. When the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the advanced state in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating in this way (when operating), the lighting of all the plurality of light emitters is controlled.

The integrated display effect in the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be started before or during the change of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 from the retracted state to the advanced state. As described above, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating, the display effect may be executed by turning on all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is visible. Thereby, the effect of the turning operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be increased. In addition, by lighting all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not they can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player can visually recognize the light emitters that are not subjected to the lighting control by simple control. Can be suppressed.

A ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 are provided with a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a program management area R01 serving as a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, and a voice data first storage area serving as a second storage area in which voice data is stored. R11 is provided.
In the effect data memory 90123A, the sound data second storage area R12 as a storage area for storing sound data and the image data first as a storage area for storing image data.
A storage area R21 is provided. The effect data memory 90123B is provided with an image data second storage area R22 as a storage area for storing image data. The audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 include a speaker 908.
Audio data used for controlling audio output by R, 908L is stored. In the first image data storage area R21 and the second image data storage area R22, together with the image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the light emitter units 9071- Image data used for lighting control in a plurality of light emitters aligned in 9074 may be stored.

FIG. 68 (A) shows an audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121;
The structural example of the audio | voice data memorize | stored in audio | voice data 2nd storage area R12 provided in effect data memory 90123A is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (A), the start address and end address in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 in which the respective audio data are stored correspond to a plurality of music pieces. Is set. For example, the audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is used for playing a normal BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, and is stored in a section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03. Yes. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is used for reproducing the effect sound at the time of the super reach production in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and is stored in the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05. . All the audio data corresponding to the music A-1 and the music A-2 may be stored in the audio data first storage area R11.

The audio data corresponding to the music piece B-1 in FIG. 68 (A) is used to reproduce the BGM that is in the probability changing state in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probability changing state, and the start address MA1.
It is stored in the section from 9 + 1 to the end address MA21. Here, the start address MA09 + 1 of the music B-1 has an address value smaller than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. Yes. On the other hand, the end address MA of the music B-1
1a is an address value larger than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. Thus, the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 is
The voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 9
It is stored across both the audio data second storage area R12 provided in 0123A. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 is used to play back the short-time BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the short-time state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1a + 1 to the end address MA1c. . The audio data corresponding to song X is
The pachinko gaming machine 901 is used to reproduce the effect sound during the big hit, which is the big hit gaming state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 and the music X only need to be stored in the audio data second storage area R12.

The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 shown in FIG. 68 (A) includes both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. In addition, it is stored across. Even in this case, the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 are provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A where consecutive addresses are given, so the music B-1 is reproduced. Sometimes, as in the case of playing other music, the start address and end address of the audio data are designated, the read address is updated sequentially from the start address, and the audio data is read out, so that it corresponds to the music B-1. Audio data to be read can be appropriately read.

68 (B1) to (B4) are timing charts showing an operation example of playing music in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. Among these, FIG. 68 (B1) shows a period of “execution” in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is being executed and “stop” in which they are stopped. FIG. 68 (B2) shows a gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. FIG. 68 (B3) is similar to FIG.
Among the music pieces that can be played back using the audio data as shown in FIG. FIG. 68 (B4) shows a voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and a voice data second storage area R provided in the effect data memory 90123A.
12 shows a storage area from which audio data is read out.

The variable display shown in FIG. 68 (B1) is executed before the timing T01. At this time, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 68 (B2) is a normal state. If the reach effect in the super reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in such a normal state, the music A as the normal BGM shown in FIG. 68 (A)
The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is read from the section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 so that -1 is reproduced in a loop. A section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, until the timing T01 is reached, FIG.
As shown in 3), loop playback of the music A-1 to be played back is performed, and as shown in FIG. 68 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 becomes the audio data read target area.

Thereafter, at timing T01, reach production in super reach is started. At this time, when it is determined that it is the super reach production start timing in the process of step S90452 shown in FIG. 66, the BGM off setting is performed by the process of step S90453. And the music ON setting for a super reach production is performed by the process of step S90454. Thus, during the period in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed, from the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 so that the music A-2 for the super reach effect shown in FIG. 68 (A) is reproduced. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is read out. The section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is
It is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, from the time when the super reach production start timing is reached at timing T01 until the time when the super reach production end timing is reached at timing T02, as shown in FIG. As shown in 68 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 is an audio data read target area.

At timing T02, it is determined that it is the super reach production end timing in the process of step S90455 shown in FIG. At this time, the music off setting for the super reach effect is performed by the process of step S90456, and the BGM on setting is performed by the process of step S90457. After that, at timing T03, the variable display result is “big hit”
Based on this, as shown in FIG. 68 (B2), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, for example, a dedicated music for notifying that the variable display result becomes “big hit” may be played. . Even when the variable display result is “losing”, a dedicated music corresponding to the execution of the reach effect in the super reach may be played. Alternatively, the music A-2 for super reach production may be continuously played until the timing T03. Or, in order to clearly notify the variable display result, the reproduction of the music may be paused.

If the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03, the sound corresponding to the song X from the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is reproduced so that the song X for the big hit medium effect shown in FIG. 68 (A) is reproduced. Data is read out. The section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, after the big hit gaming state at timing T03 until the big hit gaming state ends at timing T04 (FIG. 68 (
As shown in (B3), the music X is to be reproduced, and as shown in FIG. 68 (B4), the audio data second storage area R12 is the audio data readout target area.

At timing T04, the big hit gaming state is ended, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probability changing state. At this time, it is determined in step S90151 shown in FIG. 63 that it is the BGM change timing. Then, by the processing in steps S90152 and S153, the music B-1 is started from the section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a so that the music B-1 as the probability changing BGM shown in FIG.
Is read out. Start address MA09 + 1 to end address MA
The section up to 1a is included in both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, when the music B-1 is played back in a loop in the probability changing state, the audio data read target area becomes the audio data first storage area R11 of the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 of the effect data memory 90123A. There is a period. For example, during the period from timing T04 to timing T08, loop playback of the music B-1 to be played is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (B3). In this period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05 and in the period from timing T06 to timing T07, as shown in FIG. 68 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 becomes the audio data read target area. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T05 to timing T06 and in the period from timing T07 to timing T08, as shown in FIG. 68 (B4), the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area.
Even during the period after timing T08, the music B-1 as the BGM during the probability variation may be played back in a loop until the probability variation state ends or until the reach effect in the super reach is executed. Good.

As described above, when the music B-1 that is the BGM being changed in the probability changing state is played back in a loop, the audio data read target area is provided in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. The audio data is switched to the second storage area R12. Audio data second storage area R1 in the effect data memory 121
2 corresponds to a specific address range that continues from the last address of the audio data first storage area R11 in the ROM 90121. Therefore, the CPU 90130 has the music B-1
If the start address MA09 + 1 and the end address MA1a are specified, the audio data can be read while updating (incrementing) the address as in the case of reproducing other music, and the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 is converted to the audio data. The music B-1 can be reproduced by smoothly reading from both the first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, at least a part of the effect data is included in the effect data used for the execution of effects by various effect devices by executing the effect data transfer process in the initial setting process of step S9056. For example, the ROM 90121
Transferred to the M90122 or work memory 90131, or the effect data memory 90123
A to 90123C or the like may be transferred to the VRAM 90141 or the like. In this case, for example, control for transferring image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B to the VRAM 90141 is started, and in parallel with this transfer, the movable member 90 is started.
An initial operation according to 51 to 9054 or the like may be performed. As described above, by performing the initial operation of the movable member in parallel with the transfer of the predetermined production data, the production data can be efficiently transferred and the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

Alternatively, for example, the first effect data used for the execution of the effect by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA, for example, the operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the speaker 9 are used.
It may be transferred with priority over the second effect data used to execute an effect different from the effect produced by the display device, such as audio output by 08L and 908R. In this case, in parallel with the transfer of the second effect data, the main image display device 9 is used by using the already transferred first effect data.
An initial signal is supplied to 05MA or the like. As a result, the production data is efficiently transferred, and the initial display by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA can be started within a short time after the power supply is started. Stable display can be suppressed.

In the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial display of the display device may be started after the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial operation of the movable member is started. Further, in the effect data transfer process, transfer of normal data for operation used for normal operation of the movable member may be started, and then transfer of normal data for display used for normal display of the display device may be started. In this way, for example, as in the movable members 9051 to 9054, the second
For example, main data display device 905 may be used as the effect data used for the execution of the effect by the effect device.
The transfer is performed in preference to the effect data used for execution of the effect by the first effect device such as MA. Thereby, the presentation data is efficiently transferred, for example, the movable members 9051 to 90.
By making it possible to start the initial operation by 54 or the like within a short time after the power supply is started, the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, in the initial setting process of step S9056,
Control for executing an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed. As such an initial operation, the movable members 9051 to 9054 are moved from the retracted state as the second state that does not overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA.
You may change to the advance state as the 1st state which overlaps with the display screen (display area) of main image display device 905MA. Thereby, for example, by making the display area of the main image display device 905MA on which unstable display is performed difficult or impossible to visually recognize, the occurrence of delay can be suppressed while appropriately performing the initial operation.

Alternatively, as an initial operation based on the control in the initial setting process, an effect device such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be operated with an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns in the notice effect or the reach effect.

FIG. 69 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the upper mechanism 9050T including the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the upper mechanism 9050T. The movable members 9051 and 9052 included in the upper mechanism 9050T are pivotally supported by the decorative member 9057 and can be rotated.
51 and the movable member 9052 have different rotation ranges. That is, the movable member 9052 is
It can be rotated to the retracted position and the advanced position with respect to the movable member 9051. Movable member 905
1 has a configuration in which a base body is disposed behind a front surface portion provided with a plurality of light emitters, and holds a movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body.

As shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the upper mechanism 9050T is in the retracted state as the initial state, the longitudinal direction of the movable member 9051 is positioned on the upper side in a state along the substantially horizontal direction. FIG.
In the operation pattern T1 shown in FIG. 9B, the movable member 9052 can be rotated without moving the decorative member 9057 and the movable member 9051 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. In the operation pattern T2 shown in FIG. 69 (C), the movable member 9051 is moved in accordance with the downward movement of the decorative member 9057 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG.
9052 can be rotated in an overlapping state. The operation pattern T shown in FIG.
3, the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operation motor 9060 A as the decorative member 9057 is moved downward, and the movable member 9052 is rotated relative to the movable member 9051 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060 B. The movable member 9
052 can be advanced.

FIG. 70 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the lower mechanism 9050B including the movable members 9053 and 9054 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the lower mechanism 9050B. The movable members 9053 and 9054 provided in the lower mechanism 9050B are connected to the frame of the lower support unit via a predetermined link mechanism, and can move within a predetermined range by the power of the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. Examples of the link mechanism include link members 90642a and 90642b and a link member 90645 shown in FIG.
a, 90645b, and the like. One end of each of the link members 90645a and 90645b is pivotally supported by the frame, and the other end is pivotally supported near the lower end of the movable member 9054 to guide the movement of the movable member 9054.

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the lower mechanism 9050B is in the retracted state as the initial state, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is positioned downward, and the movable member 9
053 is positioned behind the movable member 9054, and the player can hardly see the movable member 9053. In the operation pattern B1 shown in FIG.
Due to the driving force of C, the movable member 9053 is moved upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with a slight rotation. In the operation pattern B2 shown in FIG. 70C, the movable member 9054 can be moved upward in accordance with the movement of the movable member 9053 by the further driving force of the operation motor 9050C.

The initial operation pattern makes it possible to execute an initial operation in which the upper mechanism 9050T is continuously operated in the operation patterns T1 to T3 and an initial operation in which the lower mechanism 9050B is continuously operated in the operation patterns B1 and B2. Initial operation for operating the upper mechanism 9050T, and the lower mechanism 90
The initial operation for operating 50B may be set such that each initial operation is executed in order and the execution periods of each other do not overlap, or at least a part of the execution periods overlap,
Each initial operation may be set to be executable in parallel. Even when the initial operations are executed in sequence, the initial operation executed before the initial operation time elapses is an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns.
54 and the decorative member 9057 are operated. In addition, when the initial operations are executed in parallel, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration are used in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns in a period in which the initial operation is executed in parallel. The member 9057 is operated.

Thus, the movable member 9051 is an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns.
˜9054 and the decorative member 9057 are operated. Thereby, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the effect device can be operated with a plurality of operation patterns corresponding to the effect accompanying the execution of the game, and the operation can be appropriately confirmed.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

As a specific example, in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 58 that the relay unconnected flag is on, notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 is not performed. That is, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016
When A is connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed, while the production control board 9
When 012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, control is performed so as not to notify the movable member of abnormality. At the same time, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. It is controlled to display the checksum calculation contents and the like by the update display. That is, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the calculation result of the checksum can be displayed, while the effect control relay board 9 is displayed.
When either one of 016A and main board 9011 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, control is performed so that the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the control whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed and the control whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be displayed. As long as it is configured to be able to be realized.

Below, the modification regarding abnormality notification of a movable member is demonstrated first. In the above embodiment, if it is determined in step S9057 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the processes in steps S9058 and S9059 are performed in step S906.
It has been described that control is performed not to check the origin position but also to confirm the origin position by not performing the process with the process of 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the relay unconnected flag is on, both steps S9058 and S9059 or only step S9058 may be executed. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be confirmed based on the position detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061. While determining whether or not the origin is abnormal, control may be performed so that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed when the origin abnormality occurs.

Alternatively, even when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are in the unconnected state, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be performed, while the notification mode of the abnormality notification is the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. Compared to the notification mode of abnormality notification when the relay board 9016A is connected, the notification mode may be difficult to recognize. For example, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the image display size is reduced, the image transparency is increased, and the image display is performed. Reduce the time period, reduce the number of image impressions,
Or what is necessary is just to be able to set it as the alerting | reporting aspect which cannot recognize abnormality alert | report of a movable member by the combination of these part or all. When a notification operation is performed using a plurality of effect devices, a notification mode in which it is difficult to recognize an abnormality notification of the movable member by reducing the number of effect devices used for the notification operation may be adopted. As described above, the range of the connection state of whether or not the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected is determined, and the limit of the abnormality notification that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not executed is determined, or What is necessary is just to set a limit to the abnormality notification of the movable member according to the connection state by determining the limit of the abnormality notification to be executed in a notification mode that is difficult to recognize.

In the embodiment described above, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed in the initial setting process in step S9056 even when the relay unconnected flag is on. On the other hand, when the relay unconnected flag is on, it may be controlled not to execute the initial operation of the movable member. That is, the production control board 90
In the case where the initial operation of the movable member can be executed when 12 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. You may control not to perform the initial operation | movement of a movable member.

In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9012, such as the effect control relay board 9016A.
And a board connected directly via the harness HN1 (without going through another board), and controlling so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when it is not connected to the effect control board 9012 explained. In contrast, for example, like the drive control board 9016B,
Control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when the board indirectly connected to the stage control board 9012 is not connected to the stage control board 9012 through another board such as the stage board 9016A for stage control. May be.

In the above embodiment, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C that provide the driving force for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the movable member position sensor 9061 that detect the operation state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are all provided. It has been described as being connected to the drive control board 9016B. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which provided separately the board | substrate with which operation motor 9060A-9060C is connected, and the board | substrate with which movable member position sensor 9061 is connected. For example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be connected to the drive control board 9016B, while the movable member position sensor 9061 may be connected to a sensor board different from the drive control board 9016B. In this case, different control may be performed on a plurality of boards that can be directly or indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 according to the connection state. As an example, an effect control board 9012 and a drive control board 901
When the production control board 9012 and the sensor board are in an unconnected state while 6A is connected directly or indirectly, the initial operation of the movable member is executed while the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed. You may control not to perform. In addition, the production control board 9012 and the drive control board 9
When the production control board 9012 and the sensor board are connected directly or indirectly while 016A is not connected, the initial operation of the movable member is not executed while the abnormality notification of the movable member is issued. It may be controlled to perform.

In the above embodiment, as a configuration for detecting the state of movable members such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, the position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be detected using the movable member position sensor 9061. On the other hand, any state can be used as long as it can detect an arbitrary state in the movable member and can perform abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. For example, a sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the speed, acceleration, movement amount, rotation amount, operation time, shape, temperature, or part or all of the movable members 9051 to 9054 at a predetermined position. What is necessary is just to set and enable the abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. In addition to the state of the movable member such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 or instead of the state of the movable member, the motor 9060 for operation.
It may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in a driving mechanism that supplies a driving force for changing (moving) a movable member such as A to 9060C, and to perform abnormality notification based on the detection result. Instead of the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the movable member may be changed (moved) by an arbitrary driving mechanism that supplies a driving force such as a solenoid. As described above, it may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in an arbitrary drive mechanism and perform abnormality notification based on the detection result.

In the above embodiment, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in step S9058 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, and if it is determined in step S9059 that there is an origin abnormality, It has been described as a notification that an origin abnormality has occurred. For example, step S906 shown in FIG. 58 is performed together with the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member or instead of the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member.
Based on the result of detecting the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like in the effect control process 5, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be executable. About the abnormality notification during the normal operation of the movable member, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9
When the 016A is connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed. On the other hand, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed. You may control as follows.

In the said embodiment, it demonstrated as what can perform abnormality alert | report about the movable member for effects like the movable members 9051-9054. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an abnormality notification may be executed for any movable member that can operate according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the solenoid 9 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG.
The wiring for driving the solenoid 9028 for 027 or the prize winning door may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board. Also, detection by a sensor for detecting the operating state of the movable wing piece provided in the normal variable winning ball device 906B and a sensor for detecting the operating state of the big winning door provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. A wiring for transmitting a signal may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board or a sensor relay board. In such a configuration, when the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board or the sensor relay board are connected, it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable blade piece or the big prize door, while the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board. Alternatively, when the sensor relay board is not connected, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable blade piece or the big prize door. Alternatively, when the payout control board and the launch control board are connected, an abnormality notification of the launch motor can be executed, while when the payout control board and the launch control board are not connected, the launch motor is abnormal. You may control not to alert | report.

Furthermore, the movable member is not limited to one that can perform abnormality notification, and may be one that can perform abnormality notification for any circuit, device, or other element. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output may be possible.

In the embodiment described above, the presence / absence of abnormality notification is changed according to the connection state between a plurality of substrates such as the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of abnormality notification may be changed according to the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, apparatus, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. That is, in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided, when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected, any abnormality notification can be performed. If the first connection unit and the second connection unit are in an unconnected state, any control may be performed so that abnormality notification is not performed. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output is possible when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided. On the other hand, when the first connection unit and the second connection unit are not connected, control may be performed so that no output is performed. Further, the unconnected state between the substrates and the unconnected state between the connection portions may include a state in which at least a part of wiring is connected and another part of the wiring is not connected. .

Next, a modified example in the case of displaying the checksum calculation result and the like will be described. In the above embodiment, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, a memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is off, step S902 is performed.
It has been described that control is performed so as not to display the checksum calculation result or the like by not performing the process 06. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011 in step S9054 shown in FIG. It may not be done. That is, if the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected even when the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected, the ROM
Control may be performed so that the checksum calculation itself using the effect data stored in 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is not executed, and the calculation result is not displayed accordingly. Further, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is turned on.
5 may be executed. In this case, step S9 shown in FIG.
In step 0205, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined that there is no connection, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed in step S90206, while if it is determined that there is a connection. In such a case, it may be controlled not to display the checksum calculation result or the like by not executing the process of step S90206. As described above, when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result is not executed by not executing the process of calculating the checksum itself. May be controlled so as not to be displayed, or the processing for calculating the checksum may be executed but the checksum calculation result may not be displayed.

Alternatively, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed even when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. , Main board 9011 and effect control relay board 901
Compared to the display mode in the case where both 6A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the display mode may be difficult to recognize. For example, the main image display device 905MA
When displaying the checksum calculation result or the like by displaying the image on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU, reducing the image display size, increasing the image transparency, and shortening the image display period. As long as the number of times the image is displayed or a combination of some or all of them can be displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult to recognize the checksum calculation result or the like. Thus, whether the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected or not.
1 and the production control relay board 9016A and the production control board 9012 are determined to be in a non-connected state range, and the display limit is not displayed such that the checksum calculation result is not displayed. Alternatively, it is only necessary to set a display limit according to the connection state by setting a display limit to display in a display mode that is difficult to recognize.

In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, while the effect control relay board 9016A is directly connected via the harness HN1 (via another board). It was described as being connected to the effect control board 9012. On the other hand, for example, a production control relay board 90 as in the drive control board 9016B.
For a plurality of boards indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via other boards such as 16A, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like are displayed. It may be possible to control so that the checksum calculation result or the like is not displayed when a part of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. Alternatively, for a plurality of boards that can be directly connected to the effect control board 9012, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, and one of them can be displayed. When the display unit and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, it may be controlled not to display a checksum calculation result or the like.

In the above embodiment, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123.
As a determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in C is normal, FIG.
In step S90204 in the memory inspection process as shown in FIG.
It has been described that the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the data determination method is not limited to the checksum calculation, and any determination method may be employed. The checksum calculation is not limited to calculating an exclusive OR for each address data, but may be an exclusive OR calculation using data at a plurality of addresses as an operation unit.

In the above embodiment, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 901
It has been described that the checksum of the stored data is calculated for all of 23C, and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the checksum of the stored data may be calculated for a part of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result may be displayed. Whether or not a checksum is to be calculated may be varied depending on the contents stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, an effect control program and various management data stored in the first storage area of the ROM 90121, and effect data memories 90123A, 90
As for the image data stored in 123B, the calculation result can be displayed as the checksum calculation target, while the audio data stored in the second storage area of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A is stored. Audio data other than image data, motor data and light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C are not subject to checksum computation, and computation results may not be displayed. Depending on the condition of establishment of predetermined calculation conditions, the setting of which stored data is used to calculate the checksum may be varied. For example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed, the checksum is calculated using the data stored in the ROM 90121, and the calculation result can be displayed, while the effect data memories 90123A to 90123 are displayed.
The checksum calculation using the stored data of 123C may not be performed.

In the above embodiment, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123.
The storage device that is mounted on the effect control board 9012 and can store the effect data used to execute the effect, such as C, has been described as being able to display the determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage device capable of storing control data used for arbitrary control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can display a determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. May be. For example, the main board 9
Control data mounted on 011 and used for game control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (
ROM 90 capable of storing (including binary code constituting a program module)
For 101, it may be possible to display a determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. In this case, for example, a main board 9011 such as a payout control board or an information terminal board.
Among the plurality of substrates connectable to the second substrate and the third substrate may be set in advance. Then, when both the second substrate and the second substrate are not connected to the main substrate 9011, the determination result of the stored data such as the checksum calculation result using the stored data of the ROM 90101 is displayed as the main image display device 905MA. Can be displayed on a display device such as
When either one of the substrate and the third substrate and the main substrate 9011 are not connected, it may be controlled not to display the determination result of the stored data. Further, the present invention is not limited to determining whether the storage data of the nonvolatile recording medium such as the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, for example, the RAM 90122 or the work memory 9
It may be determined whether or not the storage data of the volatile recording medium such as 0131 is normal and the determination result can be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the checksum calculation result that is the determination result of the stored data according to the connection state between the plurality of boards such as the connection board between the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the production control board 9012. It was explained as something that changes whether or not to display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the determination result of the stored data is displayed depends on the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. It may be a thing. That is, in the configuration in which the second connection portion and the third connection portion connectable to the first connection portion are provided, both the second connection portion and the third connection portion and the first connection portion are in an unconnected state. The determination result by the determination process using the stored data can be displayed, and the stored data is used when either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state. You may control not to display the determination result by determination processing. The second connection unit and the third connection unit are not limited to the display of the determination result by the determination process using the stored data, and the second connection unit and the third connection unit are provided in the configuration in which the second connection unit and the third connection unit connectable to the first connection unit are provided. When both of the first connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state, any processing result using arbitrary data can be output, and either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit May be controlled so as not to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data.

In addition, various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the configuration for confirming the connection state uses a voltage at a connection confirmation terminal such as the terminals TM22 and TN22 shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, or determines whether or not a command is received. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a configuration in which a connection state can be confirmed mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically using a switch or a sensor may be used.

In the above embodiment, in the process of step S90102 shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probable change state,
The description has been made assuming that the probability variation control condition is established based on the determination of the probability variation state, and that the probability variation state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning prize opening (second winning prize opening) is won in the probability variation attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area (
The probability variation control condition may be established based on the fact that the entered game ball is detected by the probability variation detection switch, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability variation state. The probability winning attacker's big prize opening (second big prize opening) can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. It may be constituted so that.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, the variable winning device provided in the game area is closed (second state) based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) through the start winning opening provided in the game area.
When the game ball that has been changed from the open state to the open state (first state) and entered the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) of a plurality of areas, a big hit game that is advantageous to the player It may be controlled by the state. In such a pachinko gaming machine 901, FIG.
The control of whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by executing the production control main process as shown in FIG. 8 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. It may be configured such that at least one of the results and the like can be displayed.

The above form can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols as a plurality of types of identification information, and can be assigned a predetermined game value based on the game result,
More specifically, by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, the game can be started and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be individually identified can be changed. A display result of a variable display device (for example, a plurality of reels) to be displayed is derived and displayed, and one game is completed.
This is a gaming machine in which watermelon winning, bell winning, replay winning, BB winning, RB winning, etc.) can be generated. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment has the feature that hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided. That is, in the slot machine, whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 58 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. Of the control and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed, at least one of them may be realized.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the ceiling LED 909a
Various rendering operations including lighting operations in the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine, for example. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

As described above, in the above embodiment, for example, step S9057 shown in FIG.
If it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on, the origin abnormality notification is not performed in step S9060. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is OFF, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 can be executed. In this way, the first board such as the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 90.
When the second substrate such as 16A is in an unconnected state, it is controlled not to notify the abnormality of the movable member, so that the abnormality notification is not frequently executed at the manufacturing stage or the development stage. Working efficiency can be improved.

Connectors CN01 and CN11 shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) include terminals TM22 and TN22, which are connection confirmation terminals, respectively. In step S9052 shown in FIG. 58 and the like, based on the voltage at these connection confirmation terminals. Check the connection status. Thereby, a connection state can be confirmed with a simple configuration.

In the above embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is on. In addition, the check sum calculation contents and the like are displayed by the update display in step S90206. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, or in step S9020 shown in FIG.
If it is determined in step 5 that the relay unconnected flag is off, the update display in step S90206 is not performed, and the checksum calculation content and the like are not displayed. Thus, in the configuration including the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second and third boards such as the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011, either the second board or the third board is provided. When one side and the first substrate are not connected, the output for inspection can be appropriately suppressed by controlling not to display the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result. As a result, for example, one of the second board and the third board and the first board are accidentally disconnected (temporarily disconnected from the cable) while being installed in an amusement store, and the power is turned on. In the situation, the display of the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the erroneous recognition of the failure at the game shop side.

Further, for example, the ROM 90121 as shown in FIG. 41A stores audio data used for audio control, and the effect data memory 90123A as shown in FIG. 41B1 contains image data used for display control. When stored, the audio data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range of the effect data memory 90123A continuous from the last address of the ROM 90121. Thus, by storing the first control data such as voice data in the area corresponding to the specific address range of the second area that is continuous from the final address of the first area, the storage area can be effectively used to reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition to the reduction, the control data can be read smoothly and appropriate control can be performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, A: B = 10
It is a concept that includes those with different ratios in a relationship such as 0%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machines 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5HL First hold display unit 5HR Second hold display unit 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning game Ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start switch 23 Count switch 100 Game control micro Computer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit AHA Active display area AHW Active display frame H1 to H4 Reserved display 901 Pachinko machine 905MA Main image display device 905SU Sub image display device 908L, 908R Speaker 909a Top frame LED
909b Left frame LED
909c Right frame LED
9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9016A Production control relay board 9016B Drive control board 9016C to 9016F Light emitter control board 9051 to 9054 Movable member 9060A to 9060C Operation motor 9061 Movable member position sensor 9071 to 9074 Light emitter unit 90120 For effect control Microcomputer 90121 ROM
90123A-90123C Production data memory 90130 CPU
90140 VDP
90411, 90413a to 90413c Light emitter driver 90411 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminals

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
A notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for continuously reporting over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation level;
A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means,
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means,
The output means is set to the second output state;
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed. A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
A notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for continuously reporting over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation level;
A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means,
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided on the other board connected via the wiring member to the board on which the output means is provided,
The output means is set to the first output state;
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed.